JP2017127438A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: First holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a first operation port and second holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a second operation port. When the first holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a first special pattern display section, and when second holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a second special pattern display section. Also, the game round in the first special pattern display section and the game round in the second special pattern display section can be executed in an overlapping manner. Further, a high probability state is completed when the number of execution times of the game rounds reaches a completion reference number of times. In this case, when the first holding information corresponding to a big winning result is acquired in the high probability state, preliminary notification for number of times notification or preliminary notification for shoot promotion is executed, in accordance with the continuous number of times of remaining game rounds in the high probability state at that point in time.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry A configuration is known in which a game ball enters a special game state based on the game ball entering the club. When the special gaming state is entered, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting entrance part,
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information;
A first privilege granting means for granting a player a first privilege based on the result of the grant determination being a grant response result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means to
Transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
Ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state after the number of times of execution of the gaming times has reached an end reference number in the advantageous gaming state;
Special notification control for causing the special notification corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information acquired by the special information acquisition means to be executed at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the grant determination. Means,
With
The special notification control means determines the number of triggers which is one of the number of game times executed in the advantageous game state and the number of remaining game times required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous game state. Content adjustment means for making the execution content of the special notification different is provided as at least one criterion.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the effect for game times is performed in a symbol display apparatus in a normal game state. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the effect for game times is performed in a symbol display apparatus in a high probability state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electricity control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st pending | holding information in main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd pending | holding information in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specification process of the fluctuation | variation display period in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. (A) to (g) of game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where one is acquired It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of adjustment of a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a low probability hit result is invalidated. (A) to (g) of game times when the other is acquired in a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of adjustment of a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a low probability hit result is invalidated. (A) to (g) of game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired in a situation where the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of adjustment of a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a highly accurate hit result is not invalidated. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition in the main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a 1st special figure reservation area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the execution area for 1st special figure, (c) 2nd special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a figure holding | maintenance area, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the execution area for 2nd special drawings. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the front hold in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the said pending | holding in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition performed in main side MPU in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special pitching apparatus in a non-receiving state, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special pitching apparatus in a receiving state. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the duration of game times. (A)-(e) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a game progresses in each of a normal game state and a high probability state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electricity control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st pending | holding information in main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd pending | holding information in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the specification process of the fluctuation | variation display period in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for small hits in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the pending | holding command in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process in display side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the frequency | count notification performed with a symbol display apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the firing promotion notification performed with a symbol display apparatus. . (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in sound light side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the read-out process of the effect lottery table in sound-light side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st effect lottery table and a 2nd effect lottery table. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the timing when a special effect is performed. It is a front view of the game board in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the pending | holding alert | report in main side MPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a pending | holding alert | report is performed.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying a game ball stored in an upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or when a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a winning ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, ten winning balls are paid out, and when a special ball winning device 32 is thrown, 15 prize balls are paid out. .

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Further, the present invention is limited to a configuration in which both the number of prize balls when a ball enters the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls when a ball enters the second operation port 34 are plural. Alternatively, the number of winning balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 may be one, and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 is one. There may be a certain configuration, and the number of both winning balls may be one.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side.

  The lower frame portion 36a, which is the lower portion of the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is provided with a stage portion 36b so as to extend in the lateral direction above the first operation port 33, and variable display unit 36 is provided. In the left frame portion 36c, which is the left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, an entrance of a warp passage that allows a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. A portion 36d is formed. A central portion in the lateral direction of the stage portion 36b exists vertically above the first working port 33, and a derivation portion 36e for deriving a game ball by its own weight to the lower portion of the stage portion 36b in the central portion. Is formed. In this case, the game ball derived to the stage unit 36b and derived from the area other than the deriving unit 36e to the lower side of the stage unit 36b is difficult to enter the first operation port 33, but the deriving unit 36e. The game ball led out to the lower side of the stage portion 36b enters the first operation port 33 with a high probability.

  The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display part 37a and a second special figure display part 37b. In the first special figure display section 37a, a winning display to the first working port 33 is used as a trigger and a lottery is performed, whereby a variation display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In the second special figure display unit 37b, a winning lottery is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, whereby a variation display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b are comprised by the segment indicator by which a some segment light emission part is arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. Moreover, as a pattern displayed on the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b, the structure by which a multiple types of character is displayed, the structure by which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters A configuration in which is displayed or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure hold display part 37c and a second special figure hold display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The maximum number of game balls won in the first operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the maximum number of game balls won in the second operation port 34 is reserved, and the number of reserves is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the symbol variation display or the predetermined display is performed in the first special symbol display unit 37a based on the winning in the first operation port 33, the symbol variation display or the predetermined display is performed accordingly. In addition, when the second special figure display unit 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display on the basis of a winning in the second operation port 34, a variable display or a predetermined display is performed accordingly. . In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode described later that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is done.

  Display is started in any of the special symbol display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 based on the winning in any one of the operation ports 33, 34, until a predetermined result is displayed and ended. It corresponds to one time. The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which at least a part of the game times execution period in the first special figure display unit 37a can overlap with at least a part of the game times execution period in the second special figure display unit 37b. ing. That is, even when the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game times can be started in the second special figure display unit 37b, and the game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. Even in the middle of being played, the game times in the first special figure display section 37a can be started.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a winning / nothing determination process is executed based on winning in the operation ports 33 and 34, and the determination result of the winning / failing determination process becomes a winning result, thereby shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. In the open / close execution mode, opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is executed, and a payout to the special electricity prize winning device 32 which is in an open state is generated, so that a game ball is paid out. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined opening continuation period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a special electric prize device 32. That is. In this case, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. , The opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special prize apparatus 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than one game ball will win. Further, the upper limit number of round games is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  As the success / failure lottery mode of the success / failure determination process, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of a winning result in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs is relatively high. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes in which the general electric utility 34a of the second working port 34 is opened are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the general electric utility 34a is opened per unit time when compared with the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that is relatively high and low. When the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, and when the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. Hereinafter, a gaming state that is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is referred to as a normal gaming state, and a gaming state that is the high probability mode and is the high frequency support mode is referred to as a high probability state.

  Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in a lower area PA1 that is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Also, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as working port devices in a state where the first working port 33 is arranged in the vertical direction with the first working port 33 facing upward and the second working port 34 facing downward. Has been. In addition, the electric utility item 34a of the second operating port 34 can be controlled to be opened in response to winning of the through gate 35. The through gate 35 is an area on the left side of the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. It is arranged in a certain left area PA2. The game ball flowing down the left area PA2 is guided to the lower area PA1, and the game ball guided to the lower area PA1 is guided to the area where the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are provided. Can be done. Therefore, when a launch operation is performed aiming for a winning at the first working port 33, not only a winning at the first working port 33 can occur, but also a winning at the second working port 34 can occur, When a launch operation is performed aiming for a winning at the second working port 34, not only a winning at the second working port 34 can occur but also a winning at the first working port 33 can occur.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode as described above, so that it is difficult for the second operation port 34 to win a prize and the first operation port is more than the second operation port 34. It is easy for a winning to 33 to occur. Accordingly, in the normal gaming state, basically, the execution target of the game times is the first special figure display unit 37a, and when the winning to the second operation port 34 occurs accidentally, the second special figure display unit 37b is It becomes the execution target of game times.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high-probability state, the support mode is the high-frequency support mode as described above, so that winning to the second operating port 34 is likely to occur. In this case, in the high probability state, a winning to the second working port 34 is more likely to occur than the first working port 33. However, as described above, when a launch operation is performed aiming for a prize at the second working port 34, a winning at the first working port 33 may occur and it is guided to the lead-out part 36e of the stage part 36b. Since the game ball wins the first operation port 33 with a high probability, even if the game ball is in a high probability state, the first operation port 33 is won with the same frequency as in the normal game state. Therefore, in the high probability state, both the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b become the execution targets of the game times at a predetermined frequency. Therefore, in the high probability state, an event in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b overlap easily occurs.

  An effect for game times is executed on the symbol display device 41 in a manner corresponding to the pattern of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b that are the target of game times. The display content of the symbol display device 41 in the case where an effect for game times is executed will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B, display contents of the symbol display device 41 when an effect for game times is executed in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which an effect for game rotation is executed on the symbol display device 41 in the normal gaming state.

  In the normal game state, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a normal hold display area 42 and a decoration area 43 are basically displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The normal reserved display area 42 is set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and an area other than the normal reserved display area 42 is set as the decoration area 43 on the display surface. The decorative area 43 has a larger display area than the normal reserved display area 42.

  In the normal hold display area 42, an image for informing the player of the number of hold information acquired by the main control device 71, which will be described later, based on winning in the first operating port 33 is displayed. The hold information is information that triggers execution of the success / failure determination process in the main control device 71 and information that triggers execution of the game times. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as “first hold information”) acquired upon winning the winning at the first operating port 33 becomes an execution timing of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and wins at the second operating port 34. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) acquired using as a trigger becomes an execution trigger of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b. A maximum of four pieces of first hold information are stored on hold, and a maximum of four pieces of second hold information are stored on hold. As described above, in the normal gaming state, winning in the first operating port 33 is likely to occur, but winning in the second operating port 34 is difficult to occur. Therefore, while the image for notifying the player of the number of the first hold information is displayed in the decoration area 43, the image for notifying the player of the number of the second hold information is not displayed.

  Specifically, regarding the display contents of the normal hold display area 42, the normal hold display area 42 displays the number of hold images G1 corresponding to the number of the first hold information. That is, if the number of first hold information stored on hold is zero, the hold image G1 is not displayed in the normal hold display area 42. If the number of first hold information stored on hold is one, one hold image G1 is displayed. If the number of first hold information stored on hold is two, two hold images G1 are displayed. If the number of first hold information stored and stored is three, three hold images G1 are displayed. If the number of first hold information stored and stored is four, the hold image G1 is displayed. Are displayed. When a plurality of hold images G1 are displayed, the plurality of hold images G1 are displayed side by side so as to have a constant interval. Further, when the number of first hold information stored on hold increases, the hold image G1 is displayed so as to increase to the right, and the first hold information is held and stored as a trigger for starting the game. When the number of the first hold information is reduced, the hold image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left. In the case of FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the number of first hold information stored on hold is two, and therefore two hold images G1 (black circles) are displayed in the normal hold display area 42. Image) are displayed side by side.

  In the decoration area 43, a plurality of (specifically, three) common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed, and an effect character G5 is displayed behind the common symbol images G2 to G4. In detail about the display contents of the common symbol images G2 to G4, three cube-shaped base symbol images G6 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and a symbol symbol G7 is displayed in front of each base symbol image G6. Then, the base symbol image G6 rotates in the vertical direction around the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol image G6, and the symbol G7 displayed on the front surface of each base symbol image G6 along with the rotation. Is changed. The symbol G7 is a number from “1” to “9”, and in the normal gaming state, the same symbol G7 is displayed in all cases when the winning / failing determination process is executed in response to the first hold information. When the rotation display of the common symbol images G2 to G4 is stopped and the winning result is not obtained, the same symbol G7 is not displayed. In addition, when the winning / decision result is obtained and the result is a high-accuracy big hit result to be described later, all of the same odd symbols G7 are displayed, and the later result is a low-precision big hit result to be described later. Are all in the state where the same even-numbered symbol G7 is displayed. In addition, when the reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as the winning result is high is executed, in the situation where the same symbol G7 is stopped and displayed in the left common symbol image G2 and the right common symbol image G4, Reach variation in which the rotation display of the common symbol image G3 is continued is performed. If the winning / unjudging process result is a winning game, the central common symbol image G3 is stopped from rotating while the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed. If the result is a game time that is an outlier result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped while the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are continuously displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are not displayed or reduced. It is good also as a structure by which the utilized display effect is performed, and in addition to or instead of displaying the common symbol images G2 to G4, the symbol display device is configured to hide the normal hold display area 42. The entire display surface 41 may be configured as the decoration area 43.

  In the normal game state, the normal display display area 42 and the decoration area 43 are displayed on the symbol display device 41 as described above. When a game round is executed with the hold information as an opportunity, an additional decoration area 44 is set in a part of the decoration area 43, and the variable display of the symbol G 7 is executed in the additional decoration area 44. The display area of the additional decoration area 44 is set to be narrower than the display area of the area other than the additional decoration area 44 in the decoration area 43 and is displayed so as not to overlap the common symbol images G2 to G4 and the effect character G5. Is done.

  A plurality of symbols G8 to G10 are displayed in the additional decoration area 44, and at the start of the game times, the plurality of symbols G8 to G10 are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction. The symbols G8 to G10 displayed in the additional decoration area 44 are displayed by reducing the image data for displaying the symbol G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 to a predetermined size. In the normal gaming state, when the winning / failing determination process is executed with the second hold information as an opportunity, the scroll display of the symbols G8 to G10 is stopped while all the same symbols G8 to G10 are displayed. If the winning result is not obtained, the same symbols G8 to G10 are not displayed when the scroll display is stopped. In addition, when the winning / notifying process results in a winning result and a high-accuracy big hit result to be described later, all the same odd symbols G8 to G10 are displayed, resulting in a low-precision big hit result to be described later. In this case, all the same even symbols G8 to G10 are displayed. In addition, when the reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as the winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is performed in a situation where the same left symbol G8 and right symbol G10 are stopped and displayed. Reach fluctuations continue. If the result of the determination process is a game that is a winning result, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is stopped in a state where the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped and displayed, If the result is a game time that is an outlier result, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is stopped while symbols G8 to G10 different from the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped.

  By displaying only the normal hold display area 42 and the decoration area 43 without displaying the additional decoration area 44 in the situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information are not executed as described above, It is possible to secure the normal hold display area 42 and the decoration area 43. On the other hand, in the situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information are executed, the additional decoration area 44 is displayed, so that only the game times triggered by the second hold information are notified. Instead, it can be emphasized that the game round has been started in response to the second hold information.

  Next, the display content of the symbol display device 41 in the case where an effect for game times is executed in a high probability state will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which an effect for game times is executed on the symbol display device 41 in a high probability state.

  In the high probability state, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 has a first individual display area 45, a first hold display area 46, and a second individual display. An area 47, a second reserved display area 48, and a decoration area 43 are displayed. The first individual display area 45, the first reserved display area 46, the second individual display area 47, and the second reserved display area 48 are set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The display areas of these display areas 45 to 48 are the same or substantially the same, the first individual display area 45 is set at the left corner, and the first reserved display area 46 is set to the right of the first individual display area 45. The second hold display area 48 is set to the right of the second hold display area 48, and the second individual display area 47 is set to the right corner. In addition, an area other than the display areas 45 to 48 on the display surface of the symbol display device 41 is set as the decoration area 43. The display area of the decoration area 43 is set wider than that of the display areas 45 to 48, and the display area of the decoration area 43 is set wider than the total display area of the display areas 45 to 48. ing.

  In the first individual display area 45, an image display corresponding to the game is executed in response to the first hold information, and in the second individual display area 47, the second hold information is used as a trigger. In a situation where game times are being executed, the corresponding image display is performed. In detail about the contents of the image display, a plurality of symbols G11 to G13 are displayed in the first individual display region 45 and the second individual display region 47, and at the start of the corresponding game times, the plurality of symbols G11 to G13. G13 is scroll-displayed in the vertical direction. The symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the first individual display area 45 and the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the second individual display area 47 use the same image data between the same types. The symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 are displayed by using the image data for displaying the symbol G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 after being reduced to a predetermined size.

  If the winning result is determined by the winning / failing determination process executed with the corresponding hold information as an opportunity, the scroll display of the symbols G11 to G13 is stopped with all the same symbols G11 to G13 being displayed, and the winning result is displayed. Otherwise, when the scroll display is stopped, all the same symbols G11 to G13 are not displayed. In addition, in the case where a winning result is obtained in the determination processing, if the result is a high-accuracy big hit result to be described later, all the same odd symbols G11 to G13 are displayed, resulting in a low-probable big hit result to be described later. In this case, the same even number of symbols G11 to G13 are displayed. In addition, when the reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as the winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is performed in a situation where the same left symbol G11 and right symbol G13 are stopped and displayed. Reach fluctuations continue. If the result of the determination process is a winning game, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is stopped in a state where the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed. If the result is a game time that is an outlier result, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is stopped while symbols G11 to G13 different from the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of reach symbols are stopped.

  In the first hold display area 46, an image display for notifying the player of the number of first hold information stored on hold is performed, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of second hold information stored on hold. Is displayed to notify the player. The contents of the image display are the same as the contents of the image display in the normal hold display area 42. Specifically, the number of holds corresponding to the number of pieces of first hold information stored in the first hold display area 46 is reserved. The image G1 is displayed, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of hold images G1 corresponding to the number of pieces of second hold information stored on hold is displayed.

  In the decoration area 43 in the high probability state, the effect character G5 is displayed as in the normal gaming state. In the high probability state, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed as shown in FIG. 5A until the reach effect is started in either the first individual display area 45 or the second individual display area 47. There is nothing. On the other hand, when the reach effect is started in either the first individual display area 45 or the second individual display area 47 in the high probability state, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is started. In this case, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed in a manner corresponding to the display manner of the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect is started. That is, a predetermined reach symbol combination is displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect is started, but the symbols constituting the reach symbol combination also in the common symbol images G2 to G4. A combination of reach symbols by symbols G7 of the same type as G11 to G13 is displayed. Then, in the situation where the combination of reach symbols is displayed, the rotation display in the central common symbol image G3 is executed. If the winning / unjudging process result is a winning game, the central common symbol image G3 is stopped from rotating while the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed. If the result is a game time that is an outlier result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped while the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of reach symbols is stopped. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are continuously displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are not displayed or reduced. It is good also as a structure by which the utilized display effect is performed, and in addition to or instead of displaying the common symbol images G2 to G4, the symbol display device is configured to hide the normal hold display area 42. The entire display surface 41 may be configured as the decoration area 43.

  When the reach effect is started on one of the first individual display region 45 and the second individual display region 47 and then the reach effect is started on the other, the decoration region 43 corresponds to the side on which the reach effect is started first. Reach production is executed. In this case, even if the reach effect being executed in the decoration region 43 ends in the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47, In the decoration area 43, the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47 is not executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing which one of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 is to be executed in the decoration area 43. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47, the reach effect executed in the decoration area 43 ends and the game corresponding thereto When the turn is completed, the decoration area 43 may start a reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display areas 45 and 47.

  Returning to the description of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the determination result of the success / failure determination process is the winning result, the process proceeds to the opening / closing execution mode as described above. In the opening / closing execution mode, opening / closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. In the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 62 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 64 is provided above the window unit 61. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 65 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 61, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 66 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 67a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 66a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board accommodated in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 82 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 83 is executed. A RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82 and a payout control device 77 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 85 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 82 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 85.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 86 a to 86 e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86 a to 86 e include a detection sensor 86 a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86 b provided in the special electric prize winning device 32, a detection sensor 86 c provided in the first operation opening 33, and a second operation. A detection sensor 86d provided at the mouth 34 and a detection sensor 86e provided at the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 makes a winning determination for each winning corresponding winning portion. Further, the MPU 82 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning part. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91.

  On the output side of the MPU 82, a special electric drive unit 32 b that opens and closes the open / close door 32 a of the special electric prize device 32, a general electric drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric utility item 34 a of the second operating port 34, A figure unit 37 and a universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display part 37a, a second special figure display part 37b, a first special figure reservation display part 37c, and a second special figure reservation display part 37d. Are all connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38a and a universal map display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 81, and the MPU 82 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 82 performs drive control of the special electricity driving unit 32b so that the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility item 34a is won, the MPU 82 performs drive control of the power generator 34b so that the power utility item 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 82. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the general electric utility 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the general map unit 38 is executed in the MPU 82.

  The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power / fire control device 78, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main controller 71, the payout controller 77, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit 78a for turning on electricity and a power supply unit 78b for power interruption during the power supply / launch control device 78. For example, the power supply unit for power supply 78a is connected to a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply. It has the function to do. The power supply unit 78b for power interruption is composed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit 78a for power supply when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power source). Is charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 78b during the interruption is discharged. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 78b during power interruption. Retained.

  Here, the RAM 84 of the main controller 71 temporarily stores information on the current game state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout controller 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Is done. In this case, since the backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply unit for interruption 78b as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit for power supply 78a, the current game It is possible to store and hold the state, the progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the backup power is not supplied to the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power interruption unit 78b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the sound emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 78a is turned off. Erased.

  The capacity of the power supply unit 78b for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The The power interruption power supply unit 78b is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit 78b for power interruption. In the power source / launch control device 78, even after the DC stable power source of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, by discharging from the power source unit for power failure, a sufficient time for execution of the power failure process described later, The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. As a result, the main controller 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  In addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a launch control unit 78c. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing controller 78c.

  The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand contacts the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the detection of the handle operation is emitted. Output to. The firing control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electric signal. In addition, the firing control unit 78c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c. The amount of rotation operation of is grasped.

  The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main controller 71 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is established. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player from the touch sensor 28a, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 82 with a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment). If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition establishment signal corresponding to the condition establishment.

  In the MPU 82, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the game ball can be permitted to be launched, the MPU 82 sends a HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) to the launch control unit 78c. Will continue to be sent. Note that the MPU 82 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when the HI level condition establishment signal is not received from the launch control unit 78c, but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launch mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 82, the launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 27. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). The Further, since the firing strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of launching, the game ball is launched with strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

  The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 93 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 64 and the speaker unit 65 based on the command received from the main control device 71 and transmits the command to the display control device 101.

  The display control apparatus 101 includes a display control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 103 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A certain RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. In the MPU 103, the symbol display device 41 is controlled based on the command received from the sound emission control device 91.

  Although not shown, the display control board 102 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 103. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads out image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display the image data. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the main controller 71 are referred to as the main MPU 82, main ROM 83, and main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the sound emission controller 91 are used as sound light. The MPU 103, the ROM 104, and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are referred to as the display MPU 103, the display ROM 104, and the display RAM 105, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main-side MPU 82 uses various counter information in the game, and wins winning lottery, setting of display of the first special figure display unit 37a, setting of display of the second special figure display unit 37b, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41 The display setting of the general chart display unit 38a is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery and the jackpot type are determined. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure The display units 37a and 37b and the variation type counter CS that determines the variation display period in the symbol display device 41 are used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for lottery for determining whether or not the general-purpose item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the electric-character open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 84.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a special figure hold provided in the main side RAM 84 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in area 122. The special figure reservation area 122 includes a first special figure reservation area 125, a second special figure reservation area 126, and an execution area 127 for special drawings.

  The first special figure reservation area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 125a to 125d as the first hold information. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when the winning to the first working port 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the second area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 125d. Thus, by providing the four areas 125a to 125d, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 are stored on hold. The number that can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The second special figure holding area 126 includes a first area 126a, a second area 126b, a third area 126c, and a fourth area 126d, and a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as the second hold information. In this case, in the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the second area when the winning to the second operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d as described above, up to four game ball winning histories to the second operation port 34 are held and stored. The number that can be reserved and stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  The special drawing execution area 127 includes a first special drawing execution area 127a and a second special drawing execution area 127b. The first special figure execution area 127a stores the first hold information to be subjected to special figure determination or distribution determination when the first special figure display unit 37a starts variable display. It is an area. The second special figure execution area 127b stores second hold information to be subjected to special figure determination or distribution determination when the second special figure display unit 37b starts variable display. It is an area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the first holding information stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed for the first special figure. It is moved to the area 127a. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the second holding information stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is stored in the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Moved.

  Information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose holding area 123 when a winning to the through gate 35 occurs. The general-purpose holding area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 according to the winning history to the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 128a to 128d as the hold information on the normal side. In this case, in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d, the first area 128a → the second area 128b → the third area 128c → the fourth area when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs a plurality of times continuously. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 128d. Thus, by providing the four areas 128a to 128d, up to four game balls winning histories to the through gate 35 are reserved and stored. Note that the number that can be reserved and stored in the ordinary map holding area 123 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be.

  In the ordinary map holding area 128, an execution area 129 for ordinary maps is provided. The execution area 129 for the common map is an area in which the hold information to be subjected to support determination for support when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a is stored. Specifically, when the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 128a of the general map hold area 123 is moved to the execution area 129 for normal maps.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 within a range of “0” to “250” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general-purpose holding area 123 of the main RAM 84 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

  As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general electric utility 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the power utility 34a of the second working port 34 is per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the power train open state in the power train open lottery process using the power train random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is opened when the public power open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration of one display on the display unit 38a is set short (specifically, 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode and 10 seconds in the low frequency support mode).

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The open state of the electric train ends when the electric utility 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the second operating port 34. To do. Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing of the electric utility 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas the high-frequency support mode is more often than in the low-frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, the duration of one opening of the electric utility 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, but 3 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of “0” to “599” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and the game ball is stored in the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing of winning. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won in the determination of the success / failure is stored in the main ROM 83 as a success / failure table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  A low accuracy determination table and a high accuracy determination table are provided as the determination tables. Two pieces of numerical information that are jackpot results are set in the low probability table (for example, “5” and “305”), and twenty pieces of numerical information that is a jackpot result are set in the high probability table (for example, “5” and “305”). For example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”, “334”, “365”, “ 392 "," 420 "," 470 "," 495 "," 520 "," 558 "," 575 "," 599 "). The success / failure lottery mode in which the low-accuracy determination table in which the low-accuracy determination table is referred to is the low-probability mode. In the low-probability mode (that is, in the normal gaming state), when the determination process is executed on the first hold information acquired based on the winning at the first operating port 33, and the winning at the second operating port 34 The low-accuracy determination table is referred to in any case where the determination process is performed on the second hold information acquired based on the above. Further, in the high probability mode (that is, the high probability state), either the case where the success / failure determination process is executed for the first hold information or the case where the success / failure determination process is executed for the second hold information. Is also referred to. Further, all types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the high probability table. Thereby, the hold information that is a jackpot result in the normal gaming state becomes the hold information that is a jackpot result even in the high probability state.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of “0” to “29”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33, and the game ball is stored in the second operation opening 34. It is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing of winning. Then, a distribution determination process is performed using the value of the stored jackpot type counter C2. The type of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 83 as a sorting table. In the distribution table, a low probability big hit result and a high probability big hit result are set as types of the big hit results.

  The low probability winning result triggers the start of the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it is a big hit result that becomes a low probability mode regardless of whether the winning lottery mode before entering the opening / closing execution mode, and low regardless of which support mode before entering the opening / closing execution mode. It is a jackpot result that becomes frequency support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode result in a highly probable hit result and are continued until the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  The most advantageous jackpot result triggers the opening and closing execution mode. In addition, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, it is a big hit result that becomes a high probability mode regardless of whether the lottery mode before switching to the opening / closing execution mode, and high regardless of the support mode before switching to the opening / closing execution mode. It is a jackpot result that becomes frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, “0” to “14” correspond to the low probability big hit results among the big hit type counters C2 of “0” to “29”, and “15” to “29” correspond to the high probability big hit results. It corresponds. Regardless of whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the distribution determination process is further executed for the first hold information and the distribution determination process is executed for the second hold information. In either case, the same distribution table is referred to.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of “0” to “238”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a reach effect is set as already described as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41.

  The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game times corresponding to the detachment result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 83. Executed when corresponds to the occurrence of reach display.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within the range of “0” to “198”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 82 determines the variation display period in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the symbol variation display period in the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is determined when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and when the symbol variation is started by the symbol display device 41. To be acquired.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 82>
Next, each process performed in order to advance a game in main side MPU82 is demonstrated. The main MPU 82 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, first, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 82 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “1”. (Step S105). In addition, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data (step S106). S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase button is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 84 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 84. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase button has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal, and step S109 is not executed without executing step S108. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 84 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state ST1 to ST4 is used to recognize the current gaming state ST1 to ST4. Is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. In addition, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 77.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (step S110). In addition, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is performed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical value information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S113). If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started repeatedly with a period of 4 msec.

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111 (step S203), and the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112 (step S204). Thereafter, a game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and information for switching to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for ordinary power is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, a winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, signals received from the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are read, and the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are read. A process for specifying whether or not there is a ball is executed.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S212). In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 28, as already described, one game ball is launched in 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined launch cycle.

  Thereafter, as input status monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 86a to 86e and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of Step S208 (Step S208). S213).

  After that, a first special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first hold information is executed (step S214), The second special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second holding information is executed (step S215). In addition, a general drawing power control process for performing the support lottery of the power utility 34a and the opening / closing control of the power utility 34a is executed (step S216). The details of the general map power control process are as follows: when the winning to the through gate 35 occurs, the number of reserved information on the general map side stored in the general map reservation area 123 is less than four. Then, the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the general-purpose holding area 123. Further, in the general map / general power control process, the variable display of the pattern is not executed on the general map display unit 38a, and the general power utility 34a of the second working port 34 is controlled to open and close in a predetermined manner. In the situation that is not in the open state, when the hold information on the general map side is stored in the general map hold area 123, the hold information on the general map side stored in the first area 128a of the general map hold area 123 is stored. Shift to the execution area 129 for usual use. Then, the electric train open lottery process is executed for the hold information on the normal map side, and the variable display of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a is started. In this case, it is specified whether the support mode at that time point is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the variable display of the pattern is performed over the variable display period corresponding to the support mode corresponding to the specification result. Display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is executed so as to be executed. If the result of the public train opening lottery process is a public train open state winning, the variation display of the pattern on the general map display unit 38a is terminated in a state where the corresponding pattern is stopped, and the result of the public train opening lottery process If is not elected in the open state in the ordinary power train, the variation display of the pattern on the common map display unit 38a is terminated in a state in which the corresponding pattern is stopped. In the case where the result of the public power open lottery process is the public power open state winning, when the change display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state is shifted to the general power open state. In the open mode, the support mode when the open mode is started is specified as the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode, and the mode of the support mode corresponding to the specific result is specified. The opening / closing control of the general electric utility 34a is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, even if the previous support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the general-purpose open lottery process of the general utility 34a are performed in a mode corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. And the opening / closing control of the electric utility 34a is executed.

  Thereafter, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S216, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the first hold information on the first special figure hold display unit 37c, and the increase / decrease number of the second hold information Setting of output information to be reflected in the second special figure hold display section 37d and setting of output information to reflect the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the normal drawing side in the general figure hold display section 38b are performed (step S217). . Further, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S216, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set, and the normal map display is performed. The output information for updating the display content of the unit 38a is set (step S217).

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S218). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S220).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing of steps S207 to S220, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<First Special Figure Special Electric Control Process and Second Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the first special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10, and the step of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. The second special figure special power control process executed in S215 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Since the first special figure special power control process and the second special figure special electric power control process are similar in processing configuration, each corresponding processing configuration will be described.

  In the first special figure special electric control process, when winning to the first operating port 33 is generated, a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed and the first hold information is stored. Whether or not the first hold information is determined is determined, and further, a process for performing an effect for game times is executed using the determination as to whether the determination is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In the second special figure special electric control process, when winning to the second operating port 34 occurs, a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed and the second hold information is stored. Whether or not the second hold information is determined is determined, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the determination as to whether the determination is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), first, the first hold information acquisition process is executed (step S301). In the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), first, the second hold information acquisition process is executed (step S401).

  In the acquisition process of the first hold information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12A, a winning to the first working port 33 has occurred (step S501: YES), and further in the first special figure hold area 125. When the number of stored first hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S502: YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. It should be noted that the process of monitoring whether or not a winning has occurred at the first operating port 33 is executed in the winning detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and a winning has occurred. The winning data corresponding to the winning device in which the winning has occurred is set in the main RAM 84. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main-side RAM 84 is provided for the main-side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125. The value of the first special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure hold display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37 c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125.

  After that, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, the storage corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S503 Store in the area (step S504). Thereafter, a setting process at the time of acquisition is executed (step S505). Although the details will be described later in the setting process at the time of acquisition, a process for adjusting the duration of the game times that is triggered by the other held information that is already stored on hold according to the content of the currently held information. Run.

  Thereafter, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S506). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, whereby the number of the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. Change the display to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

  In the second hold information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12B, a winning to the second working port 34 has occurred (step S601: YES), and further in the second special figure hold area 126. When the number of stored second hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S602: YES), a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed. Note that the process of monitoring whether or not a prize is generated at the second operating port 34 is executed in the prize detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and a prize is generated. The winning data corresponding to the winning device in which the winning has occurred is set in the main RAM 84. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

  In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main side RAM 84 provides the main side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The value of the second special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S603). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37d corresponds to the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126.

  Thereafter, each value of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, the storage corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S603. Store in the area (step S604). Thereafter, setting processing at the time of acquisition is executed (step S605). Although the details will be described later in the setting process at the time of acquisition, the process for adjusting the variable display period of the game times that is triggered by the other held information that has already been stored in accordance with the contents of the currently acquired held information Execute.

  Thereafter, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S606). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 and increasing the number of hold. Change it according to.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 11), after executing the holding information acquisition process (step S301 or step S401), the main ROM 83 The stored special figure special power address table is read (step S302, step S402). In the special figure special power address table, the start of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 84 An address is set.

  The first special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the processing contents to be executed in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10). The first special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling an effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game times, a special figure change start process (step S305) which is a process for starting the effect for the game times and an effect for the game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set. Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S308) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 32 Special electric power opening process (step S309), special electric power closing apparatus processing (step S310) for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S311), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set. When the value of the first special figure special electricity counter is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electricity counter is “1”, the special figure When the process during fluctuation (step S306) is the execution target and the value of the first special figure special electricity counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S307) is the execution target, and the first special figure special electric counter When the value is “3”, the special electricity start process (step S308) is an execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electricity counter is “4”, the special electric open process (step S309) is the execution object. When the value of the first special figure special power counter is “5”, the special electric power closing process (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electric power counter is “6” Ending process (step S311) It is executed.

  The second special figure special electricity counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the processing contents to be executed in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11). Similar to the first special figure special power control process, the second special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effect for game play and a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for game times, a special figure change start process (step S405) that is a process for starting the effect for game times and an effect for game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S407), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set. Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S408) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 32 Special electric power open processing (step S409), special electric power closing device processing for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32 (step S410), opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power end process (step S411), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set. When the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S405) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “1”, the special figure When the process during fluctuation (step S406) is the execution target and the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S407) is the execution target, and the second special figure special electric counter When the value is “3”, the special power start process (step S408) is the execution target, and when the value of the second special figure special power counter is “4”, the special power open process (step S409) is the execution target. When the value of the second special figure special counter is “5”, the special electric power closing process (step S410) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special counter is “6” Ending process (step S411) It is executed.

  Specifically, for the special figure special power address table, “0” to “6” of each special figure special electric power counter correspond to the start addresses SA0 to SA6, respectively, and the start address SA0 is special figure variation start processing (step S305, The start address of the program for executing step S405), the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure changing process (step S306, step S406), and the start address SA2 is confirmed. The start address of the program for executing the intermediate processing (step S307, step S407), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special electricity start processing (step S308, step S408), and the start address SA4 Is the special electric release open process (step S309, scan The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electricity closing process (step S310, step S410), and the start address SA6 is the special electric end process. This is the start address of the program for executing (Step S311, Step S411).

  In the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S302, step S402), the corresponding special figure special electric counter is set. A start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special power address table (steps S303 and S403), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (steps S304 and S404). Hereinafter, special figure change start processing (step S305, step S405), special figure change processing (step S306, step S406), special figure confirmation processing (step S307, step S407), special electric charge start processing (step S308, step S408) ), Special electricity open processing (steps S309 and S409), special electricity close processing (steps S310 and S410), and special electricity end processing (steps S311 and S411) will be described individually.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start processing in steps S305 and S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure variation start process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit state process is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) (step S701). As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed on the other side. In this case, step S701 is executed, and when the big hit state process is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), the processes after step S702 are executed. The start of a new game is restricted. As a result, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed in response to the game times in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time in the other is not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), it is determined in step S701 whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is three or more. If it is, the process after step S702 is not executed. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is 3 or more. In step S701, if the number is three or more, the processing after step S702 is not executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined whether or not the corresponding reserved number is one or more (step S702). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the first holding information are stored in the first special figure holding area 125. If it is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 126.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, a data setting process is executed (step S703). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Moving. Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of the 1st special figure reservation area 125 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a, and the second area 125b The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, and the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the 1st special figure reservation display part 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed into the content which the 1st reservation information decreased by one. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 is stored in the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Moving. Thereafter, processing for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 126a, and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, and the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease time command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure reservation area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41. Change according to the decrease in the number.

  After the data setting process is executed, the game times are executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), and the hold information that triggers the start of the game times is a jackpot result It is determined whether or not (step S704). The main RAM 84 is set with a first low probability big hit flag and a first high probability big hit flag corresponding to the first hold information, and a second low probability big hit flag and a second corresponding to the second hold information. A high probability big hit flag is set. The first low probability jackpot flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the first hold information corresponds to the low probability jackpot result as a result of execution of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first hold information. The first high-accuracy big hit flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the result corresponds to the high-precision big hit result as a result of executing the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process on the first hold information. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first hold information. The second low probability hit flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the second hold information corresponds to the low probability big hit result as a result of execution of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. This flag is cleared to “0” when the open / close execution mode is triggered by the second hold information. The second high-accuracy big hit flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the second on-hold information corresponds to the high-precision big hit result as a result of executing the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. This flag is cleared to “0” when the open / close execution mode is triggered by the second hold information. In step S704, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), "1" is set in the second low likelihood hit flag or the second high likelihood hit flag in the main RAM 84. If this time is the special figure variation start process of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the first low-probability hit flag or the first high-probable big win flag in the main RAM 84 is set to “1”. ”Is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S704, a success / failure determination process is executed (step S705). In the winner determination process, if the winner lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low-probability table is stored in the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / notch lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. . After reading the success / failure table, for the determination of success / failure from the hold information stored on the start side of the current game round in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S706: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S707). In the distribution determination process, a common distribution table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of the current game state and the types of special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the starting targets of the game times. Then, from the hold information stored on the start side of the current game round in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, the information for distribution determination, that is, the jackpot type By reading the numerical information acquired from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which kind of jackpot result corresponds to the read numerical information.

  After executing the allocation determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the allocation determination process (step S708). Specifically, when the game turn start target is the first hold information, and the first hold information corresponds to the low probability big hit result, “1” is set to the first low probability big hit flag, If the game turn start target is the first hold information, and the first hold information corresponds to the high probability big hit result, “1” is set to the first high probability big hit flag, and the game turn start target Is the second hold information, and if the second hold information corresponds to the low probability winning result, the second low probability winning flag is set to “1”, and the game turn start target is the second hold information. If the second hold information corresponds to the high probability big hit result, “1” is set to the second high probability big hit flag. In the following description, the determination process for determining whether or not the various jackpot results are made is performed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. Further, the state in which “1” is set in step S708 is cleared to “0” when the special electric power termination process described later is terminated when the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  After executing the flag set process for the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S709). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets of the current game round, is a stop for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. The result information is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the picture to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S709, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S708 is stored in the main RAM 84. In addition, the pattern stop mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some jackpot results. Although the method for selecting the stop result for the jackpot result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  When the result of the determination process is not a jackpot result (step S706: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S710). Specifically, in the current game round, information on the pattern form that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. It becomes one kind of.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S704, that is, the game turn is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), and the game turn is triggered to start If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the above-described stop result setting process for the outlier result is executed without executing the success / failure determination process (step S710). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the game times can be started on the other side even if the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already-executed game times corresponds to any jackpot result, the newly executed game times will have the hold information that triggered the start of the game times. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it becomes the game times corresponding to the outlier result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot result from being executed repeatedly. In addition, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game time is prevented, the hold information that is the start target of the game times is acquired. Regardless, there is a risk that it will become clear that the currently executed game times are game times corresponding to the jackpot result, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if it is the case, it becomes possible to prevent such an event from occurring by adopting a configuration in which a new game round can be started.

  When the process of step S709 or step S710 is executed, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S711). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the variation display period specifying process. In the process for specifying the variable display period, first of all, on the side where the hold information that is the start target of the current game round is stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the set flag that has been set (step S801). Although the details of the set flag will be described later, when the variable display period of the game times corresponding to the hold information that is the start target of the current game times is determined as the adjustment period, the data corresponding thereto is displayed. This is an area for setting. When “1” is set in the set flag (step S801: YES), the corresponding process (step S806) is executed. The contents of the process will be described later.

  If “1” is not set in the set flag (step S801: NO), the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83 (step S802). Specifically, it is first determined whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, when the game times that are the start target this time correspond to the jackpot result, that is, the game times that are the start time of the current game time among the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. When “1” is set in either the low-probability big hit flag or the high-probability big hit flag on the current side, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. In addition, even if the game time that is the start target this time does not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the start target side is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect occurs, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The reach non-occurrence variation display period table is read from the main ROM 83.

  Thereafter, the current numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired (step S803), and the variation display period is determined by collating with the variation display period table read out in step S802 (step S804). Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S805). The special figure special electricity timer counter is provided corresponding to each of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. In step S805, the variable display period information is set in the special figure special timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process of step S210 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 9). By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the pattern in the first special symbol display unit 37a or the second special symbol display unit 37b and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 are performed. When the game is ended, the state in which the result of stopping the game is displayed is displayed as a final stop over the final stop period. In this case, the information of the variable display period read in step S804 is a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game times. In other words, the duration of game times is the sum of the variable display period and the final stop period. The same applies to the variable display period read out in step S806.

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), after the change display period specifying process is executed, the sound side MPU 93 receives the change command and the type command corresponding to the game time that is the start target this time. (Step S712). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S711, and the game time that is the start target is in any of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether it is compatible is included. Further, the change command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. In addition, if the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, information directly indicating whether or not the reach effect is to be executed is a change command. It may be set to. The type command includes information on whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any kind of jackpot result This information is included.

  Thereafter, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b which is the start target of the current game round (step S713). If the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 11), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter (step S714). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation in-process ( “1” corresponding to steps S306 and S406).

<Processing content of sound-side MPU 93>
As described above, the information on the fluctuation display period read out as described above is set to the fluctuation command and transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times in the sound light side MPU 93 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 93.

  First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 82 is executed (step S901). FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the table setting process. When a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S1001: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S1002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the determination of the success / failure determination and the distribution determination determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of the current game round is specified, and the specified information is used as the sound side. Write to RAM95.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the information on the change display period included in the change command is information corresponding to the adjustment period (step S1003). Although the details of the adjustment period will be described later, when the content of the newly acquired hold information is the content of the adjustment occurrence target, it is set as the duration of the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired at that time. It is a period. If the period corresponds to the adjustment period (step S1003: YES), the corresponding effect setting process (step S1007) is executed. The contents of this process will be described later.

  If it does not correspond to the adjustment period (step S1003: NO), a process for determining the content of the effect at the time of non-adjustment is executed. As a process for the determination, an effect lottery process is first executed (step S1004). In the effect lottery process, when the current game time is a game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the normal game state, the game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is the execution target in the high probability state If the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be executed in the high probability state, the execution content of the effect in the decoration area 43 of the symbol display device 41 is determined by lottery. For example, the action pattern of the effect character G5 is determined by lottery, or an image display pattern other than the effect character G5 is determined by lottery. In this case, if the game time that is the start target this time is a jackpot result, the selection probability of the high expectation effect will be higher than the selection probability of the low expectation effect, and the game time that is the start target will be If it is an outlier result, the selection probability of the low expectation effect is higher than the selection probability of the high expectation effect. Further, in the effect lottery process, when the current game time is a game time for which the first special figure display unit 37a is an execution target in the normal game state, the first special figure display unit 37a is an execution target in the high probability state. If the game times are game times, or if the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be executed in a high probability state, and the game times generate a reach effect, the type of reach effect is determined by lottery. decide. In this case, if the game time being started this time is a jackpot result, the selection probability of the high expectation reach production will be higher than the selection probability of the low expectation reach production, and the game being started this time If the result is out of time, the selection probability of the low expectation reach production is higher than the selection probability of the high expectation reach production.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current game time is a game time for which the second special figure display unit 37b is a variable display target in the normal game state, the effect game lottery process is not executed and the fixed effect pattern is determined. When the second special figure display unit 37b is a variable display target in the normal gaming state, the corresponding game turn effect in the symbol display device 41 is added to the additional decoration area 44 which is a part of the decoration area 43 as described above. Done. And in the effect for game times in the additional decoration area | region 44, although the change display of symbols G8-G10 is performed in the near side of a background image, display effects other than these are not performed. Therefore, as described above, when the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be subjected to variable display in the normal game state, the fixed effect pattern is determined.

  After the effect lottery process is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1005). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability winning result, information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination with the same even number of symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. If the game result of the game times is a highly probable result, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination with the same odd number of symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the change command. When a reach effect occurs, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established that is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the reach symbol are not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  Thereafter, a control table reading process corresponding to the execution content of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S1006). In this process, information on the variable display period is specified from the contents of the variable command received this time, information on the variable display period, information on the game result specified in step S1002, and effect lottery in step S1004 A control table corresponding to the combination of the processing result information and the stop result information determined in step S1005 is read from the sound light side ROM 94 and written to the sound light side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 corresponding to the current game play effect and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the current game play effect are set. Accordingly, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1008). The variation pattern command includes information on the variation display period of the game times that are to be started, information that indicates whether the game times that are to be started correspond to the jackpot result or the outage result, and the start Information indicating which of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b corresponds to the target game times, and information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S1004, And information on the stop result determined in step S1005. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display side MPU 103 starts display control for executing an effect for game times in the symbol display device 41. The contents of the display control will be described later.

  In the table setting process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S1009). In the other processing, processing for performing execution control is performed in a situation other than the above situation. For example, in the situation of the opening / closing execution mode, the table for reading and controlling the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read out by the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41. When the first hold command indicating that the first hold information is newly acquired is received from the main MPU 82, the first hold command is transmitted to the display MPU 103, and the second hold information is newly acquired. When the second hold command indicating that this is received from the main MPU 82, the second hold command is transmitted to the display MPU 103. In addition, when the first decrease command indicating that the first hold information has decreased is received from the main MPU 82, the first decrease command is transmitted to the display MPU 103 to indicate that the second hold information has decreased. When the second decrease command is received from the main MPU 82, the second decrease command is transmitted to the display MPU 103.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the table setting process, the light emission control process is executed (step S902), and the sound output control process is executed (step S903). In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in the table setting process in step S901. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 95 in the table setting process in step S901. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S904). In the pointer update process, information setting is performed to update the data to be referred to in the table read in the table setting process in step S901 to data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of display side MPU 103>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times on the display side MPU 103. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display side MPU 103 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound side MPU 93 (step S1101: YES), a command response process is executed. In the command handling process, a display pattern table for executing a display effect corresponding to the command received from the sound side MPU 93 is read from the display ROM 104 and written to the display RAM 105. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, a display pattern table for executing a game presentation display effect corresponding to the variation pattern command on the symbol display device 41 is read. In the pachinko machine 10, as already described, even when the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed on the other side. Yes, the symbol display device 41 executes effects corresponding to the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b so as to correspond thereto. When game times are executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game special effects and the second corresponding to the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a A display pattern table corresponding to each of the effects for the game times corresponding to the game times in the special figure display unit 37b is read, and display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed in a manner corresponding to the two display pattern tables. Is done. In this case, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the effect for playing the game corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b is executed in the additional decoration area 44 and the first special figure display unit. The effect for game times corresponding to 37 a is executed in an area other than the additional decoration area 44 in the decoration area 43. If the state is a high probability state, as shown in FIG. 5A, an effect for game play corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a is executed in the first individual display area 45 and the second special figure display. The effect for game times corresponding to the portion 37b is executed in the second individual display area 47, and the effect for game times on the side where the reach effect is started earlier is not only the corresponding individual display areas 45 and 47. This is also executed in the decoration area 43.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process of step S1102 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (step S1103). In the pointer update process, information setting for updating the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read out in the command corresponding process in step S1102 to the data corresponding to the current control process is performed.

  Thereafter, task processing is executed (step S1104). In the task processing, by referring to the data set in the area corresponding to the current control processing time in the currently read display pattern table, an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing is displayed as a symbol. Calculation of parameters necessary for display on the device 41 is performed. Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S1105). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time on the symbol display device 41 is created, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 102. To a VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image for one frame by creating drawing data in a frame area of a VRAM (not shown) according to the drawing list.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S306 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S406 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the case where the variation display period of the current game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not elapsed and the display timing of the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b has been updated, the special figure Data setting for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b is performed. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display parts 37a and 37b to be controlled is updated to the display content in the next order.

  In the special figure display units 37a and 37b, the mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the determination result and the determination result, and the symbol display device The game is performed in a certain manner regardless of the contents of the effects for game times at 41. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed. When the variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

  On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b on which the variable display period has elapsed. After that, the information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 is read out at the start of the game times to be ended this time. As a result, the variable display of the picture is stopped in a state where the picture corresponding to the game result of the current game time is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

  After that, information on the final stop period (specifically 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 11), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation process is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure finalizing process ( It becomes “2” corresponding to step S307 and step S407).

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, refer to the flowchart of FIG. 18 for the special figure finalizing process executed in step S307 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S407 of the second special special electric control process (FIG. 11). While explaining.

  When the final stop period has elapsed (step S1201: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S1202: YES), the current special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10, By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special counter on the side not corresponding to FIG. 11) is “0”, the special figure on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) It is determined whether or not game times are being executed on the display units 37a and 37b (step S1203). If the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side not corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is not “0” (step S1203: NO), the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is. The process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the special figure display on the side where the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed When the game times in the units 37a and 37b are finished first, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game times have not been finished yet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game times being executed from being forcibly terminated at the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game times are being executed. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being started.

  By the way, as already explained, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the game times in one of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b as a trigger, the game time in the other is not newly started. It is a configuration. By providing the configuration and the configuration of step S1203, the game times are not executed in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Therefore, in a situation where game times are being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the game times, and in a situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the open / close execution mode. It becomes.

  When the value of the special figure special power counter on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) is “0” (step S1203: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main side RAM 84 is updated. “15” is set (step S1204). The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the remaining number of executions of the round game by the main MPU 82.

  After that, information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode. (Step S1205). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S1206). Thereby, the effect corresponding to an opening period is performed in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 64, and the speaker part 65. FIG. In addition, a continuation area clear process is executed (step S1207). Although the details will be described later in this clear process, if an adjustment period has already been set as the duration of the game round for the hold information different from the hold information that triggered the game round this time, it will be deleted To execute the process.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 11), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter (step S1208). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter to be added by adding 1 is designated as a special electricity start process (step S308). , “3” corresponding to step S408).

  In the special figure determination process, if the final stop period has elapsed (step S1201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S1202: NO), the current process is the first. If it corresponds to the 1 special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to “0”, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11). If so, the value of the second special figure special counter is cleared to “0” (step S1209). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305, step S405).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step S308 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and in step S408 of the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the special electricity start process, it is determined whether or not the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electricity start process is started each time the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started until the opening period elapses. In addition, when the opening period has passed, information (specifically 29 seconds) of the open period of the round game is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter to be controlled, and a winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 Information (specifically “10”) corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 32 in one round game is set. Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed. In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 11), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”. Therefore, the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electricity release process (step S309, It becomes “4” corresponding to step S409).

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric release opening process executed in step S309 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S409 of the second special special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the special electric release opening process, the closing setting process is executed when the open duration of the special electric prize winning device 32 has elapsed, or when the special electric prize winning device 32 has won the maximum number of winning game balls. In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in a closed state. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC in the main RAM 84, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC after the 1 subtraction is “0”.

  When the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is displayed in the special map display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode. Set the special electric timer counter. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) in order to switch the process to be controlled to the special electric power closing process (step S310, step S410), the first special figure special electric The counter value is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 11), the second special figure special electricity counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electric charge closing process (step S310). , “5” corresponding to step S410).

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0”, information corresponding to the ending period (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponds to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode. Set to special figure special electric timer counter. Also, an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. Thereby, the effect corresponding to an ending period is performed in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 64, and the speaker part 65. FIG. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) in order to switch the process to be controlled to the special electric power end process (steps S311 and S411), the first special figure special electric counter If the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by two. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 2 is the special electric power end process (step S311; It becomes “6” corresponding to step S411).

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electricity closing process executed in step S310 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S410 of the second special electric figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  When the closing continuation period has passed, information on the opening continuation period of the round game (specifically 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter to be controlled, and the winning counter in the main side RAM 84 is set once. Information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electricity winning device 32 in the round game is set. Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed. In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is decremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 11), 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special electric charge closing process is executed is “5”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the object of subtraction by subtracting 1 is the special electric charge opening process (step S309). , “4” corresponding to step S409).

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special electric power end process executed in step S311 of the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and step S411 of the second special electric figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  When the ending period has elapsed, a game state setting process is executed. In the gaming state setting process, when “1” is set in the first high probability jackpot flag or the second high probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84, the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time Means that the high probability flag result and the support flag provided in the main RAM 84 are set to “1”. The high probability flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode in the main MPU 82, and the support flag indicates whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. This is a flag for specifying by the MPU 82. When “1” is set in the high probability flag and the support flag, the gaming state becomes a high probability state. In the gaming state setting process, when “1” is set in the first low probability jackpot flag or the second low probability jackpot flag of the main side RAM 84, this time the opening / closing execution mode is started. Since it means that the big hit result is a low probability big hit result, both the high probability flag and the support flag of the main side RAM 84 are cleared to “0”. When the value of the high probability flag and the support flag becomes “0”, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to “0”, and the present process is the second special figure special electric control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special counter is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S305, step S405).

<Adjustment of the duration of game times using pre-reading of hold information>
Next, a configuration for adjusting the duration of game times using prefetching of the hold information will be described.

  As already described, even if the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be started on the other side. When a game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed and the game round is newly started, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly started game round is the hold corresponding to the missed result. Treated as information. In this case, if the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result triggers the start of a new game round, the hold information that should correspond to the jackpot result Will be treated as corresponding to the outlier result, and the occurrence of the jackpot result of the newly started game times will be substantially invalidated.

  In this configuration, when the pachinko machine 10 newly acquires hold information in a high probability state in which game times are likely to be executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the acquisition is performed. When it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result at the timing, and it is specified that the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information acquired before the hold information is triggered The continuation period of the game times in the case of becoming, and the continuation period of the game times in the case where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result becomes a start opportunity are set to a predetermined adjustment period. As a result, in the situation where game times corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed, the game times are started by using the hold information that should originally correspond to the jackpot result as a starting opportunity. The jackpot result corresponding to the information can be invalidated. In addition, in a situation where game times corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed, the jackpot result corresponding to the hold information is prevented by preventing the game times starting with the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result from being started. Can be prevented from being invalidated.

  If the newly acquired hold information is the first hold information, the adjustment of the duration of the game times based on the prefetching is executed only for the first hold information and is not executed for the second hold information. Further, the adjustment of the duration of the game times based on the prefetching is executed only for the second hold information if the newly acquired hold information is the second hold information, and is executed for the first hold information. Not. As a result, the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the first hold information is limited to the game times corresponding to the first hold information and the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the second hold information Can be kept at the game times corresponding to the second hold information, and the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times can be prevented from being extremely increased.

  In addition, how to adjust the duration of game times is whether the newly acquired hold information is the first hold information or the second hold information, and the jackpot corresponding to the newly acquired hold information Uniquely corresponds to the combination of the result type and the number of stored hold information of the same system (either the first hold information or the second hold information) at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired. Is set. In other words, the game state is not considered in consideration of the execution status of the game times at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired or the number of stored hold information of a system different from the hold information at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired. How to adjust the duration of the times is determined. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times from being extremely increased.

  Hereinafter, how to adjust the duration of game times will be described in detail. First, how to adjust the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the other is acquired Will be described. 19 (a) to 19 (g), the other is acquired in a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the adjustment method of the duration of game times in a case. The adjustment of the duration of game times is executed in a high probability state and not in a normal game state, and therefore the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is a high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (a) to FIG. 19 (c), when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is newly acquired in a situation where one or more pieces of the first hold information are acquired, it is already acquired. The total duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information being adjusted is adjusted to be 120 seconds which is the first adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired in the situation where three pieces of the first hold information are acquired, the three pieces already acquired. Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the first hold information is set to 40 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “3”, which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19B, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired in the situation where two pieces of the first hold information are acquired, the two already acquired Each of the duration times of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 60 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “2” which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 19C, in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired, one already acquired The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “1”, which is the number of acquired hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (d), the duration of the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19 (a) to FIG. 19 (f), when the second hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired in a situation where one or more pieces of the second hold information are acquired, The duration of game times corresponding to the already acquired second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19G, the duration of the game time of the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is set to 250 seconds which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result is acquired in the situation where the hold information not corresponding to the big hit result is acquired as the first hold information. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big win result is acquired, the low-probable big hit result in the situation where the game times are executed with the second hold information corresponding to the high-probable big win result. Game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to is easily started. Specifically, when the duration of game times is not adjusted, the duration of game times that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game times corresponding to the low probability winning result is 120 seconds, and the maximum time is 220 seconds. On the other hand, the second special figure display unit 37b has a minimum time of 0 seconds and a maximum time of 103 seconds until the game times corresponding to the high-precision big hit results are started. In the figure display part 37b, the duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is 250 seconds.

  In this case, the time required for the game times corresponding to the low probability big hit result to be started in the first special figure display unit 37a is 120 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high specific big hit result is obtained in the second special figure display unit 37b. Even if the time required to start the game times corresponding to is 103 seconds which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 17 seconds shorter than the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds Therefore, the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result in the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high probability big win result are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b Will be started, and the low-probability result will be invalidated. Further, the time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game times corresponding to the low probability big hit result is 220 seconds, which is the maximum time, and the second special figure display unit 37b shows the high probability big hit result. Even if the time required to start the corresponding game round is 0 seconds which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 220 seconds shorter than 250 seconds which is the second opportunity adjustment period. Therefore, the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result in the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high probability winning result are being executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. It will be started and its low likelihood outcome will be invalidated.

  However, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), when the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information is not acquired, the first corresponding to the low likelihood hit result is obtained. Before the on-hold information triggers the start of game times, the first special figure display unit 37a cannot execute game times for the first adjustment total period. In this case, the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result may be started earlier than the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high probability big win result. High nature. In this configuration, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result is set to 1 second, so the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result In the middle of the execution of the game, the possibility that the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result will be reduced, and the high-precision big hit result may be invalidated. It becomes possible to reduce.

  The manner in which the low likelihood hit result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. FIG. 20A shows the duration of game times in the first special chart display unit 37a, FIG. 20B shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result, FIG. 20C Indicates the number of first hold information stored on hold, FIG. 20 (d) shows the duration of the game times in the second special figure display section 37b, and FIG. 20 (e) corresponds to the high probability winning result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 20 (f) shows the number of the second hold information stored on hold.

  First, in the situation where one first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored, the first hold information that corresponds to the low probability big hit result is acquired, and three second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored. A case will be described in which the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired in the situation where

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a) and FIG. 20 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, As shown in 20 (b), the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the number of hold of the first hold information is increased from 1 to 2. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the already stored first hold information is set to 120 seconds, which is the first adjustment total period, and the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, when the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are completed, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. In this case, the first adjustment total period is already set as the duration of the game times for the first hold information that becomes the start timing of the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the first adjustment total period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is acquired as shown in FIG. 20 (e), and the number of hold of the second hold information is 3 as shown in FIG. 20 (f). Increase from 4 to 4. In this case, the continuation period of the game times corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period, and the continuation of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time The period is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, which are situations in which the game times are continued in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the first adjustment total period, are shown in FIG. As shown in d) and FIG. 20 (f), the game times whose duration is the shortest adjustment period are started. In addition, at the timing of t7, which is a situation where the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the first adjustment total period is still continuing, in FIGS. 20 (d) and 20 (f). As shown, a game time is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result. This game time continues for 250 seconds which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, at the timing of t8, which is a situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is continued, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (c). Game times are triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. In this case, since the first hold information is handled as a miss result without executing the success / failure determination process, the low likelihood hit result is invalidated.

  Next, the first hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result is acquired in a situation where three pieces of the first hold information not corresponding to the big hit result are stored, and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed. A case will be described in which the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired in a situation where it is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the first corresponding to the highly accurate hit result as shown in FIG. 20 (e). 2 Hold information is acquired. In this case, since the second hold information is not stored separately and the game times are not being executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, as shown in FIG. Game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the acquired high probability winning result. The duration of the game times is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation in which game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is acquired, and the hold number of the first hold information is increased from 3 to 4 as shown in FIG. 20 (c). . In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to each first hold information that is already stored is set to 40 seconds, which is the result of dividing the first adjustment total period by “3”, and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, which are situations in which the game times in the second special figure display section 37b whose continuation period is set to the second opportunity adjustment period are continued, As shown in a) and FIG. 20 (c), game times each having a duration of 40 seconds are started. In addition, at the timing of t14, which is a situation where the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose continuation period is set to the second opportunity adjustment period are still continuing, in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (c). As shown, a game time is triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result. In this case, since the first hold information is handled as a miss result without executing the success / failure determination process, the low likelihood hit result is invalidated. The game times continue for 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 20 (d), as shown in FIG. 20 (d), as shown in FIG. 20 (d), as shown in FIG. 20 (d), as shown in FIG. 2. The game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result in the special figure display section 37b are completed. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the highly probable hit result.

  Next, adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability winning result and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is acquired in a situation where the other is acquired How to do is explained. 21A to 21G, the other is acquired in a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the adjustment method of the duration of game times in a case. The adjustment of the duration of game times is executed in a high probability state and not in a normal game state, and therefore the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is a high probability state.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a) and FIG. 21 (e) to FIG. 21 (f), the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired in a situation where one or more pieces of the second hold information are acquired. In the case of being played, the total of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already acquired second hold information is adjusted to be 480 seconds which is the second adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is newly acquired in the situation where three pieces of the second hold information are acquired, the three pieces already acquired. Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the second hold information is set to 160 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “3” which is the number of second hold information already acquired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), in the situation where two pieces of second hold information are acquired, when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired, the two pieces already acquired Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the second hold information is set to 240 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of the acquired second hold information. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), in the situation where one second hold information is acquired, when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is newly acquired, one already acquired The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information is set to 480 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of the acquired second hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g), the duration of the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (a) to FIG. 21 (c), when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired in a situation where one or more pieces of the first hold information are acquired, Adjustment is made so that the total duration of game times corresponding to the already acquired first hold information is 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21A, in the situation where three pieces of first hold information are acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired, the three pieces already acquired Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the first hold information is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, which is the number of the acquired first hold information. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when two pieces of first hold information are acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired, the two pieces already acquired Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the first hold information is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, one already acquired The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21A to 21G, the duration of the game time of the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result is acquired in the situation where the hold information not corresponding to the big hit result is acquired as the second hold information. In addition, when the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result is acquired, the low probability big hit result in the situation where the game round is executed with the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result as an opportunity Game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the are easily started. Specifically, when the duration of game times is not adjusted, the duration of game times that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the second special figure display section 37b to start the game times corresponding to the low probability winning result is 480 seconds, and the maximum time is 580 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is 0 second and the maximum time is 460 seconds. In the figure display part 37a, the duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is 600 seconds.

  In this case, the time required for the game times corresponding to the low probability big hit result to be started in the second special figure display unit 37b is 480 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high special big hit result is obtained in the first special figure display unit 37a. Even if the time required to start the game times corresponding to is 460 seconds which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 20 seconds shorter than 600 seconds which is the third opportunity adjustment period. Therefore, the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result in the second special figure display unit 37b in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high probability big win result are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a. Will be started, and the low-probability result will be invalidated. In addition, the time required for the game times corresponding to the low probability big hit results to be started in the second special figure display unit 37b is 580 seconds, which is the maximum time, and in the first special figure display unit 37a, the high probability big hit results are obtained. Even if the time required to start the corresponding game round is 0 seconds which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 580 seconds shorter than 600 seconds which is the third opportunity adjustment period. Therefore, the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning results in the second special figure display unit 37b in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high probability winning results are being executed in the first special diagram display unit 37a. It will be started and its low likelihood outcome will be invalidated.

  However, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), when the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired in the situation where the second hold information is not acquired, the second corresponding to the low probability hit result is obtained. Before the on-hold information triggers the start of the game times, the second special figure display unit 37b cannot execute the game times for the second adjustment total period. In this case, the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result may be started earlier than the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big win result. High nature. In this configuration, the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result is set to 1 second, so the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big win result In the middle of the execution of the game, the possibility that the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result will be reduced, and the high-precision big hit result may be invalidated. It becomes possible to reduce.

  The manner in which the low likelihood hit result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (f). FIG. 22 (a) shows the duration of game times in the first special chart display section 37a, FIG. 22 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability winning result, FIG. 22 (c) Indicates the number of the first hold information stored on hold, FIG. 22 (d) shows the duration of the game times in the second special figure display section 37b, and FIG. 22 (e) corresponds to the low probability winning result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 22 (f) shows the number of pieces of second hold information stored on hold.

  First, in a situation where one second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored, second hold information that corresponds to the low probability big hit result is acquired, and three first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is stored. A case will be described where the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired in the situation where

  As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, As shown in FIG. 22 (e), the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the number of hold of the second hold information is increased from one to two. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to the second adjustment total period of 480 seconds, and the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, when the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are completed, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are started at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 22 (d). In this case, the second adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game times for the second hold information that becomes the start timing of the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the second adjustment total period.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired as shown in FIG. 22B, and the hold number of the first hold information is 3 as shown in FIG. 22C. Increase from 4 to 4. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to each first hold information that is already stored is set to 120 seconds, which is the result of dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, which are situations in which the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose continuation period is set to the second adjustment total period are continued, are respectively shown in FIG. As shown in a) and FIG. 22 (c), game times each having a duration of 120 seconds are started. In addition, at the timing of t7, which is a situation in which the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b whose continuation period is set to the second adjustment total period is still continuing, in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (c). As shown, a game time is triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result. This game time continues for 600 seconds which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, which is the situation where the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is continued, as shown in FIGS. 22 (c) and 22 (f). Game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. In this case, since the first hold information is handled as a miss result without executing the success / failure determination process, the low likelihood hit result is invalidated.

  Next, the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result is acquired in a situation where three pieces of the second hold information not corresponding to the big hit result are stored, and the game times are executed in the first special figure display unit 37a. The case where the 1st pending | holding information corresponding to a highly probable hit result is acquired in the condition which is not performed is demonstrated.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the timing of t9, which is the situation in which the game times are being executed in the second special figure display section 37b, the second corresponding to the highly probable hit result as shown in FIG. 22 (b). 1 hold information is acquired. In this case, since the first hold information is not stored separately and the game times are not executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, as shown in FIG. 22 (a) at the timing of t9 Game times are triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the acquired high probability winning result. The duration of the game times is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation in which game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. As shown in FIG. 22 (e), second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is acquired, and the hold number of the second hold information is increased from 3 to 4 as shown in FIG. 22 (f). . In this case, each of the game duration durations corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 160 seconds, which is the result of dividing the second adjustment total period by “3”, and is acquired this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, which are situations in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third opportunity adjustment period are continued, FIG. As shown in d) and FIG. 22 (f), game times each having a duration of 160 seconds are started. In addition, at the timing of t14, which is a situation in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third opportunity adjustment period are still continuing, in FIGS. 22 (d) and 22 (f). As shown, the game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result. In this case, since the second hold information is handled as a miss result without executing the success / failure determination process, the low likelihood hit result is invalidated. The game times continue for 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the time t15, which is the timing after the game turn of the first opportunity adjustment period in the second special figure display section 37b as shown in FIG. 22 (d), as shown in FIG. 22 (a). The game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result in the 1 special figure display part 37a are finished. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the highly probable hit result.

  Next, the adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result and the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired in the situation where the other is acquired How to do is explained. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the other is acquired in a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the adjustment method of the duration of game times in a case. The adjustment of the duration of game times is executed in a high probability state and not in a normal game state, and therefore the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is a high probability state.

  As described above, in the situation where one or more pieces of the first hold information have been acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is newly acquired, the game corresponding to the already acquired first hold information The total of the continuous durations is adjusted to be 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), when three pieces of first hold information are acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired, the three pieces already acquired Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the first hold information is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, which is the number of the acquired first hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), in the situation where two pieces of first hold information have been acquired, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is newly acquired, the two pieces already acquired Each of the game duration durations corresponding to the first hold information is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. In addition, as shown in FIG. 23C, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is newly acquired in the situation where one first hold information is acquired, one already acquired The duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of first hold information that has been acquired. Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the duration of the game time of the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is set to 600 seconds which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  In addition, as described above, when one or more second hold information has been acquired, when the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is newly acquired, it corresponds to the already acquired second hold information. The duration of game times to be set is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g), the duration of the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is set to 250 seconds which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as the first hold information. In addition, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is acquired, the high-accuracy big hit result is dealt with after the game round is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-precision big hit result. Game times triggered by the first hold information are easily started. Specifically, when the duration of game times is not adjusted, the duration of game times that can be selected is 1 to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for the first special figure display unit 37a to start the game times corresponding to the highly accurate winning result is 360 seconds, and the maximum time is 460 seconds. On the other hand, the second special figure display unit 37b has a minimum time of 0 seconds and a maximum time of 103 seconds until the game times corresponding to the high-precision big hit results are started. In the figure display part 37b, the duration of the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result is 250 seconds. In this case, the first special figure display unit 37a takes 360 seconds, which is the minimum time required to start a game corresponding to the high probability big hit result, and the second special figure display unit 37b takes a high probability big hit result. Even if the time required to start the game times corresponding to is the maximum time of 103 seconds, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 257 seconds longer than the first opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds. It is. Therefore, after the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit results in the second special figure display unit 37b are finished, the game times corresponding to the high-precision big hit results in the first special figure display unit 37a are started. Predictive win results are not invalidated.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 23D, when the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate hit result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information is not acquired, the first corresponding to the high likelihood hit result is obtained. Before the on-hold information triggers the start of the game times, the first special figure display unit 37a cannot execute the game times for the third adjustment total period. In this situation, when the second hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result is acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the game time and the high probability big hit result triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result is obtained. In the situation where one of the game times as an opportunity is being executed, the other is executed, and the highly probable result on the side started later is invalidated.

  With reference to the time charts of FIGS. 24A to 24F, a description will be given of how the high-accuracy big hit result is not invalidated. FIG. 24 (a) shows the duration of game times in the first special figure display section 37a, FIG. 24 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first hold information corresponding to the high probability winning result, FIG. 24 (c) Indicates the number of first hold information stored on hold, FIG. 24 (d) shows the duration of game times in the second special figure display section 37b, and FIG. 24 (e) corresponds to the low probability winning result. The acquisition timing of the second hold information is shown, and FIG. 24 (f) shows the number of the second hold information stored on hold.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. As shown in FIG. 24 (b), the first hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the number of hold of the first hold information is increased from 1 to 2. In this case, the duration of the game times corresponding to the already stored first hold information is set to the third adjustment total period of 360 seconds, and the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time are set. The duration is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, when the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are completed, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. In this case, the third adjustment total period is already set as the duration of the game times for the first hold information that becomes the start timing of the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 will continue over the third adjustment total period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is acquired as shown in FIG. 24 (e), and the hold number of the second hold information is three as shown in FIG. 24 (f). Increase from 4 to 4. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the shortest adjustment period, and the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time Is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6, which are situations in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period, are continued in FIG. As shown in d) and FIG. 24 (f), the game times whose duration is the shortest adjustment period are started. In addition, at the timing of t7, which is the situation where the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period are still continuing, in FIGS. 24 (d) and 24 (f). As shown, a game time is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result. This game time continues for 250 seconds which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), the game times corresponding to the highly probable hit result in the second special figure display unit 37b are completed. However, at the timing of t8, since the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a whose continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period are still continuing, the opening / closing execution mode is waited without being started, and at t9 At the timing, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a being executed are completed, the opening / closing execution mode for which the start has been awaited is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, which is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode started at the timing of t9 is finished, the first hold corresponding to the highly probable hit result as shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (c). Game times triggered by information are started.

  Next, a processing configuration that enables adjustment of the duration of the game times as described above will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the setting process at the time of acquisition executed by the main MPU 82. The setting process at the time of acquisition is executed in step S505 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 12A) and in step S605 in the second hold information acquisition process (FIG. 12B). Executed.

  When the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed with the acquisition of the first hold information (step S1301: YES), whether or not the acquired first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Determination is made (step S1302). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter among the first hold information acquired this time is read, and the numerical information is set in a high-accuracy determination table which is a determination table referred to in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result. That is, the high-probability table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already described, all types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the high probability table. In this case, it is determined in step S1302 by referring to the high probability table whether or not the jackpot result is supported, so that the hold information acquired this time is in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

  When the acquired first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1302: YES), the first hold information acquired this time from the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d of the first special figure hold area 125. “1” is set to the first jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S1303). Here, the configuration of the first special figure reservation area 125, the second special figure reservation area 126, and the execution area 127 for special drawings will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d). . FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first special figure reservation area 125, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area 127a for the first special diagram. FIG. 26C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the second special figure holding area 126, and FIG. 26D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area 127b for the second special figure. FIG.

  26A to 26D, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125, the execution area 127a for the first special figure, and the second special figure reservation area 126. Each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d and the execution area 127b for the second special figure is acquired from the hit random number area in which numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is stored and from the jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type area in which numerical information is stored, a reach random number area in which numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 is stored, and a duration in which numerical information of an adjustment period set as a duration of game times is stored An area and a set flag for storing information indicating that the adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times are set. The hit random number area and the duration area each have a data amount of 2 bytes, the big hit type area and the reach random number area each have a data amount of 1 byte, and the set flag has a data amount of 1 bit. In addition, each of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 stores information indicating that the information corresponding to the hold information that is a jackpot result in the high probability state is stored. The flag is set, and information indicating that it corresponds to holding information that is a jackpot result in the high probability state is stored in each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126. The second big hit hold flag is set. The first jackpot hold flag and the second jackpot hold flag have a data amount of 1 bit.

  When the first hold information is newly acquired, the winning random number area in the area corresponding to the acquisition order of the first hold information among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the jackpot type area and reach random number area is stored. Moreover, when the 1st reservation information respond | corresponds to the reservation information which becomes a jackpot result in a high probability state, the 1st reservation of the 1st-4th areas 125a-125d of the 1st special figure reservation area 125 If the first jackpot hold flag in the area corresponding to the information acquisition order is set to “1” and does not correspond to the hold information that is a jackpot result in the high probability state, the first jackpot hold flag is “0”. Maintained. Further, when the first hold information corresponding to any jackpot result is acquired in the high probability state, the first hold among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125 Information of the adjustment period in the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the information acquisition order and the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first hold information acquired before the first hold information. Is stored, and “1” is set in the set flags of the areas 125a to 125d. When the first hold information becomes a game turn start target and the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is shifted, the hit random number area, the big hit type area of the first area 125a The information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag is shifted to the corresponding areas in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. For the second area 125b to the fourth area 125d, each information stored in the (n + 1) th area hit random number area, the jackpot type area, the reach random number area, the duration area, the set flag, and the first jackpot hold flag is stored. The area is shifted to each corresponding area in the nth area, and all areas of the fourth area 125d are cleared to “0” after the shift is completed.

  When the second hold information is newly acquired, the winning random number area in the area corresponding to the acquisition order of the second hold information among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the jackpot type area and reach random number area is stored. In addition, when the second hold information corresponds to the hold information that is a jackpot result in a high probability state, the second hold of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 If the second jackpot hold flag in the area corresponding to the information acquisition order is set to “1” and does not correspond to the hold information that is a jackpot result in the high probability state, the second jackpot hold flag is “0”. Maintained. Further, when the second hold information corresponding to any jackpot result is acquired in the high probability state, the second hold of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 is obtained. Information on the adjustment period in the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the information acquisition order and the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second hold information acquired before the second hold information. Is stored, and “1” is set in the set flags of the areas 126a to 126d. When the second hold information becomes a game turn start target and the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is shifted, the hit random number area of the first area 126a, the jackpot type area The information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag is shifted to the corresponding areas in the execution area 127b for the second special drawing. For the second area 126b to the fourth area 126d, the information stored in the hit random area, the jackpot type area, the reach random area, the duration area, the set flag, and the second jackpot hold flag of the (n + 1) th area are stored. The area is shifted to each corresponding area in the nth area, and all areas of the fourth area 126d are cleared to “0” after the shift is completed.

  Returning to the description of the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), after executing the process of step S1303, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1304). If it is not in the high probability state (step S1304: NO), the setting process at the time of the main acquisition is ended as it is, so that the process for setting the duration of the game times as the adjustment period is not executed. That is, in the normal gaming state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult to generate game times in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the duration of the game times is set to the adjustment period without meaning. It becomes possible not to be done.

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1304: YES), the first holding information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 will be earlier. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first big hit hold flag of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first hold information acquired in step S1305. That is, it is determined whether or not the first hold information acquired earlier than the first hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the process for setting the duration of game times as the adjustment period is not executed. As a result, when the first holding information that is a jackpot result in the high probability state has already been acquired, the adjustment period is not set as the duration of the game times for the first holding information. Is possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined whether or not the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is one (step S1306). When the first hold information is acquired in a situation where the first special figure display unit 37a is not executing the game times and the first special figure hold area 125 does not store the first hold information; and If the first hold information is acquired in a situation where game times are being executed in the first special figure display section 37a and the first hold information is not stored in the first special figure hold area 125, step In S1306, a positive determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S1306, the setting of the front hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired earlier than the first hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period Processing is executed (step S1307). In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1306 or when the process of step S1307 is executed, setting of the corresponding hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period Processing is executed (step S1308).

  When the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed with the acquisition of the second hold information (step S1301: NO), whether or not the acquired second hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Determination is made (step S1309). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter among the second hold information acquired this time is read, and the numerical information is set in a high-accuracy determination table which is a determination table referred to in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result. That is, the high-probability table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already described, all types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the high probability table. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result is supported by referring to the high-accuracy determination table, so that the hold information acquired this time is in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

  When the acquired second hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1309: YES), the second hold information acquired this time from the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d of the second special figure hold area 126. “1” is set to the second jackpot holding flag provided in the area where “is stored” (step S1310). After executing the processing of step S1310, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1311). If it is not in the high probability state (step S1311: NO), the setting process at the time of the main acquisition is ended as it is, so that the process for setting the duration of the game times as the adjustment period is not executed. That is, in the normal gaming state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. As a result, in a situation where it is difficult to generate game times in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the duration of the game times is set to the adjustment period without meaning. It becomes possible not to be done.

  If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (step S1311: YES), among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126, the second reservation information acquired this time is ahead. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second jackpot hold flag of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second hold information acquired in step S1312. That is, it is determined whether the second hold information acquired before the second hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process for setting the duration of game times as the adjustment period is not executed. This prevents the adjustment period from being set as the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information when the second hold information that is the jackpot result in the high probability state has already been acquired. It becomes possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined whether or not the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is one (step S1313). When the second hold information is acquired in a situation where the game times are not executed in the second special figure display unit 37b and the second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 126, and If the second hold information is acquired in a situation where game times are being executed in the second special figure display unit 37b and the second special figure hold area 126 is not stored, the step An affirmative determination is made in S1313. When a negative determination is made in step S1313, the setting of the front hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period Processing is executed (step S1314). In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1313 or when the process of step S1314 is executed, setting of the corresponding hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time as the adjustment period Processing is executed (step S1315).

  Next, the front hold setting process executed in steps S1307 and S1314 in the acquisition setting process (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that is the second hold information and has a highly probable result in the high probability state (step S1401). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the second hold information acquired this time is read, and the numerical information is identical to any one of the numerical information of the high-accuracy big hit results set in the distribution table. Determine whether you are doing it. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the shortest adjustment period setting process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126, the areas 126a to 126a corresponding to the second reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information acquired this time. Numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the 126d duration area. After that, among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126, “1” is set to the set flag of the areas 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the continuation area ( Step S1403).

  When the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, or when the hold information is the second hold information that does not result in a high probability state in the high probability state (step S1401: NO), when the first hold information is acquired this time, The number of first hold information acquired before the first hold information and stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is grasped, and when the second hold information is acquired this time, the second hold information is obtained. The number of pieces of second holding information acquired first and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is grasped (step S1404). Thereafter, the adjustment total period corresponding to the content of the hold information acquired this time is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, in the same manner as the process of step S1401, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly probable hit result in a high probability state, and the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information. And the second hold information. Then, in the case of the first pending information that results in a low probability hit result in the high probability state, numerical information of the first adjustment total period (specifically, 120 seconds) is read, and a high probability hit result is obtained in the high probability state. If it is the first hold information, the numerical information of the third adjustment total period (specifically 360 seconds) is read, and if it is the second hold information that results in the low probability hit result in the high probability state, the second adjustment is performed. Numeric information for the total period (specifically, 480 seconds) is read.

  Thereafter, a period calculation process is executed (step S1406). Specifically, the numerical information of the adjustment total period read in step S1405 is divided by the number of the hold information read in step S1404. In this case, each adjustment total period is set so as to ensure that the result of the division is an integer. Then, the adjustment period information corresponding to the result of the period calculation process is set in the corresponding continuous period area of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the second special figure reservation area 126 (step S1407). For example, when the first hold information is newly acquired, the first hold acquired before the first hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125 a to 125 d of the first special figure hold area 125. The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d in which information is stored. In addition, for example, when the second hold information is newly acquired, the second hold information acquired before the second hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 is obtained. 2 The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the hold information is stored. Thereafter, numerical information on the adjustment period is displayed in the continuation period area among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126. “1” is set in the set flags of the set areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d (step S1408).

  Next, the corresponding hold setting process executed in step S1308 and step S1315 in the acquisition setting process (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the first hold information or the second hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly probable hit result in a high probability state (step S1501). Specifically, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 out of the first hold information or the second hold information acquired this time is read, and the numerical information is a numerical value of the high-accuracy big hit result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches any of the information.

  If the hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly probable hit result in the high probability state and is the first hold information (step S1501 and step S1502: YES), the first setting process is executed (step S1503). In the first setting process, the third trigger adjustment period is included in the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d in which the first hold information acquired this time is stored among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125. Numerical information (specifically 600 seconds) is set.

  When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly probable hit result in the high probability state and is the second hold information (step S1501: YES, step S1502: NO), the second setting process is executed (step S1504). ). In the second setting process, the second opportunity adjustment period is included in the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the second hold information acquired this time is stored among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126. Numerical information of (specifically 250 seconds) is set.

  When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a low probability winning result in a high probability state (step S1504: NO), a third setting process is executed (step S1505). In the third setting process, if the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the first hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 is stored. The numerical information of the first trigger adjustment period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the continuation period areas 125a to 125d, and if the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the second special figure hold area 126 Numerical information of the first opportunity adjustment period (specifically, 1 second) is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the second hold information acquired this time is stored among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d.

  After executing any of the processes in steps S1503 to S1505, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 are performed. In “126d”, “1” is set in the set flags of the areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the adjustment period is set in the continuation period area (step S1506).

  When the above processing is executed, the duration of game times is set as the adjustment period. When the hold information in which the adjustment period is set becomes a game turn start target, the process of step S806 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S801 of the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 14). In step S806, if the game time that is the current start target is the first special figure display unit 37a, the numerical information stored in the duration area of the execution area 127a for the first special figure is read out and read out. The numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the numerical information is specified as the variation display period of the current game time. Then, the numerical information of the specified variable display period is set in the special figure special timer counter corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a (step S805). In step S806, if the game time that is the start target this time is the second special figure display unit 37b, the numerical information stored in the duration area of the execution area 127b for the second special figure is read out, and The numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the read numerical information is specified as the variation display period of the current game time. Then, the numerical information of the specified variable display period is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b (step S805). Thereby, the period for adjustment is set as a duration of game times.

  Further, when the adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times, the sound light side MPU 93 executes a process for reading out the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period in the table setting process (FIG. 16) (step). S1007). The adjustment variation table is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 94 in correspondence with each of the adjustment periods that can be set. When the effect for game times is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the result of losing, the reach effect does not occur. On the other hand, when the game turn effect is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the jackpot result, a reach effect is generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect may be generated even when the effect for playing the game is executed according to the adjustment variation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the outlier result. . In addition, the effect for the game times corresponding to the adjustment period may be configured such that the effect for the game times corresponding to the adjustment period is executed so that the player can recognize that it is the adjustment period. It is good also as a structure by which the effect of the content which makes a player recognize that it is a period for adjustment is not performed in an effect.

  When the hold information for which the adjustment period is set becomes the target of the game round, the set adjustment period will be set as the game round duration, but the adjustment period is set. When the open / close execution mode is triggered by the other hold information in a situation where the hold information is present, all the adjustment periods set at that time are deleted. Specifically, in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 18), the process of step S1207 is executed as part of the process for starting the opening / closing execution mode. In step S1207, all the duration areas and the set flags in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 and the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 are set to “ Clear “0”. As a result, for example, in the situation where the holding information for which the adjustment period is set exists, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by other holding information is executed, and the gaming state is in a high probability state after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to prevent the adjustment period from being set as the continuation period of the game times in the normal gaming state after the transition to the normal gaming state.

  Note that the clear process corresponding to step S1207 may be executed until the first game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and for example, the clear process corresponding to step S1207 is executed during the opening / closing execution mode. The clearing process corresponding to step S1207 may be executed when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, when the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode becomes a high probability state, the clear process corresponding to step S1207 may not be executed.

  In step S1302 and step S1309 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state, the newly acquired hold information is a jackpot result in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the hold information is the hold information, and if the hold information is the jackpot result in the high probability state, “1” is set to the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the hold information (step S1303, step S1303). S1310). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the adjustment period corresponding to the first to third adjustment total periods from being set for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information can be executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the overall execution frequency of the game times. In this case, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the relationship between the execution timings of the respective game times triggered by the respective hold information is predetermined. It becomes the relationship. As a result, the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are generated according to certain rules. It is possible to make the relative execution timing preferable.

  Adjustment of the relative execution timing of each game time as described above is performed by adjusting the duration of game times. As a result, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above only by adjusting the duration of the game times.

  Game times triggered by first hold information that starts before the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and second hold information that starts before the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times, the game time triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result The relationship of execution timing with game times is set to a predetermined relationship. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the relationship of the execution times of these game times easily become a predetermined relationship.

  When the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, or in the situation where the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired When the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the adjustment of the duration of the game times as described above is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above without affecting the execution timing of the other hold information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  According to at least one of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, it corresponds to the game time and the jackpot result triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result The execution timing relationship with the game times triggered by the second hold information is changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the relative execution timing of each game times preferable according to the type of the hold information.

  Among the first hold information and the second hold information, in the situation where the game is triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result among the first hold information and the second hold information, When a game round is triggered by the other hold information, the other hold information is not treated as hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode starting condition triggered by the jackpot result from being satisfied even though the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result has already been executed.

  In this case, when the first hold information corresponds to the high probability big hit result and the second hold information corresponds to the low probability big hit result, the game triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result The execution times of these game times are adjusted so that the game times can be started with the second hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result in the situation where the times are being executed. Thereby, the second holding information corresponding to the low probability big hit result having a relatively low advantage is triggered by the game times triggered by the first holding information corresponding to the high probability big hit result having the relatively high advantage. It is possible to invalidate the played game.

  In addition, when the first hold information corresponds to the high probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponds to the high probability jackpot result, the game times triggered by one of these hold information is being executed Thus, the execution timing of these game times is adjusted so that the game times triggered by the other are not started. As a result, the game time triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the highly accurate jackpot result having a relatively high advantage and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result having a relatively high advantage are triggered. It is possible to prevent one of the game times from being invalidated by the other.

  Based on the fact that the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information is adjusted, and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired. Based on the second hold information, the duration of the game times is adjusted. Thereby, compared with the structure which adjusts only one duration among the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result It is easy to make adjustments so that the relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the game times and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result becomes a predetermined relationship.

  Based on the fact that the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information in a predetermined manner regardless of whether or not the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired. Regardless of whether or not the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired based on the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result being adjusted, the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information is predetermined. It is adjusted in the mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the process for specifying the execution opportunity of each adjustment.

<Another embodiment of the first embodiment>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different form may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the first embodiment.

  -When the hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is acquired as one of the first hold information and the second hold information, and the hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired as the other hold information When the hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result is the hold information that becomes the high probability hit result in both the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result among these hold information The duration of the game times may be adjusted so that the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the highly probable hit result is to be executed are started after the game times for which is executed. This makes it possible to continue the high probability mode while increasing the number of occurrences of the jackpot result as much as possible.

  Adjustment is made so that the relationship between the execution times of the game times targeted for execution of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the game times targeted for execution of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is set to a predetermined relationship. The target is not limited to the duration of the game round, and in addition to or instead of the duration of the game round, for example, the period from the end of one gaming round to the start of the next gaming round It is good also as a structure used as adjustment object. For example, even if the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are finished in a situation where the first hold information is held and stored, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are newly started. The start waiting period may be longer than the normal period, and a plurality of start waiting periods may be set, and the start waiting period selected according to the type of event to be adjusted may be different. . In addition, for example, even when the game number on the second special figure display unit 37b is ended in a situation where the second hold information is stored on hold, the game number on the second special figure display unit 37b is newly started. It may be configured to make the start wait period until longer than the normal period, a plurality of start wait periods are set, and the start wait period selected according to the type of event to be adjusted is different Also good. By adjusting the start waiting period in addition to the duration of the game times, the types of elements to be adjusted increase, so that it is easy to make adjustments to make the relationship between the execution timings of each game time a predetermined relationship. In addition, by adjusting the start waiting period instead of the duration of game times, it is possible to make the relationship between the execution timings of each game time a predetermined relationship without affecting the duration of the game times. Become.

  -The hold information of the adjustment opportunity, which is one of the first hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result, the first hold information corresponding to the high probability hit result, and the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result, has been acquired. In this case, the duration of the game times of each destination execution target is set so that the total period of the game times of the destination execution target executed before the game times for which the hold information of the adjustment opportunity is executed is started is a predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the duration of game executions of the first execution target is different, the total period of the game executions of the first execution target is the predetermined period. It is good also as a structure adjusted so that it may become. The configuration for making the duration of the game times to be executed differently is arbitrary, but for example, while the total period of the game times to be executed previously is a predetermined period, The continuation period may be determined by lottery, or the continuation period of each game time may be determined in advance based on the relationship between the number of game times to be executed first and a predetermined period. Thereby, even if it is a case where adjustment of the duration of game times is performed, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the duration of each game time.

  -When the 1st holding information corresponding to a jackpot result is acquired in the situation where game times are performed in the 1st special figure display part 37a, the game of the 1st special figure display part 37a currently performed at that time The duration of the game times may be adjusted in consideration of the remaining time of the game. Moreover, when the 2nd pending information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the game times are being executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, the second special figure display unit 37b being executed at that time The duration of the game times may be adjusted in consideration of the remaining period of the game times. For example, when the remaining period of the currently executed game times is relatively long, the period of time required until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed is started relatively short When the remaining period of the currently executed game times is relatively short, the period required until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed is started relatively long Also good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period required until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed is started from becoming unnecessarily long.

  -It may be configured so that a reach effect is not generated in a game time that is started before the game time corresponding to the jackpot result and is the adjustment target of the duration of the game time, and the reach effect is generated. It is good also as a structure. In addition, when a reach effect is generated, an effect corresponding to the game time that is the adjustment target of the duration of the game time may be executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur in the game times after the game times that are the execution targets of the reach effects through the contents of the reach effects.

  The game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result among the first hold information and the second hold information is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. When the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed first ends in the situation where the game is executed, the opening / closing execution mode is started until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the loss result is to be executed are ended. Is not limited to the configuration in which the game information in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target, and the game time in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target is It may be configured to forcibly end and immediately start the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

  In addition, at the timing when the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target are ended, the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target are temporarily stopped, and then the opening / closing execution mode is ended. The game times that have been temporarily stopped after the game may be resumed, or the game times that have been temporarily stopped may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the game times once stopped are re-executed from the beginning, it may be configured to newly execute the determination processing for the hold information that triggered the start of the game times. It is good also as a structure which takes over a result.

  -In the situation where the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target are being executed, when the game times for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed are started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is handled as a result of disregarding regardless of the content, but the hold information on the different side is the execution target, although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the success / failure determination process A configuration may be adopted in which, when the game round ends, it is treated as an outlier result regardless of the execution result of the success / failure determination process.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the setting mode of the adjustment period is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment.

  When the hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly probable result in a high probability state (step S1601: YES), high probability as hold information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that is different from the hold information acquired this time It is determined whether or not there is pending information that results in a low probability winning result in the state (step S1602). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 has a low probability result in the high probability state. 2 If it is determined whether or not the hold information exists, and the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not there is first hold information that is a low probability winning result. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. It is determined whether or not. And when it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information to be judged is read, and the low probability big hit result in which the numerical information is set in the distribution table It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a highly accurate winning result in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state (step S1603). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the normal gaming state is included in the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the high probability state. It is. Accordingly, in step S1603, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read from the currently acquired hold information, and the numerical information matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low probability table. It is determined whether or not.

  If the hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a jackpot in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state, the hold information on the side of the special chart display units 37a and 37b that is different from the hold information acquired this time is a low It is more advantageous for the player to start the game times with the high-accuracy big hit results triggered by the hold information acquired this time after the game wins with the big hit results are completed. On the other hand, if the hold information acquired this time is a hold information that results in a jackpot if the hold information is in a high probability state, the low probability big hit triggered by the hold information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that is different from the hold information acquired this time It is more advantageous for the player to start the game times of the results in a situation where the game times of the high-accuracy big hit results are executed using the hold information acquired this time and invalidate the low-precision big hit results.

  Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, the first adjustment process is executed (step S1605) on condition that adjustment is possible (step S1604: YES). In the first adjustment process, the holding information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b side different from the holding information acquired this time is used in a situation where the game times of the high-accuracy big hit result triggered by the holding information acquired this time are executed. Adjusted as the duration of the game times for each of the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 so that the game times of the low probability big hit result triggered by the start Set the usage period. However, the holding information corresponding to the low probability winning result on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that is different from the holding information acquired this time is the next game start trigger on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b side. And when the current game times are not executed on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b, or the current game times are executed on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b. Even if the game times end timing is earlier than the game times end timing currently being executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information acquired this time, Therefore, it is impossible to set the adjustment period for causing the above-described event. In such a case, the first adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1604.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, whether or not there is pending information that is a highly accurate hit result in a high probability state as the pending information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that is different from the pending information acquired this time. Determination is made (step S1606). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 has a high-probability result in a high probability state. 2 If it is determined whether or not the hold information exists, and the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not there is first hold information that is a highly accurate winning result. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. It is determined whether or not. And when it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information to be judged is read out, and the high probability jackpot result in which the numerical information is set in the distribution table It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the second adjustment process is executed (step S1608) on condition that adjustment is possible (step S1607: YES). In the second adjustment process in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, after the game times of the low probability winning results with the hold information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time are ended Each of the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the game times of the high-precision jackpot result starting with the hold information acquired this time are started. If the adjustment period can be set as the duration of the game times, such an adjustment period is set. In this case, for example, game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, and a special figure display corresponding to the hold information acquired this time among these game times. The end timing on the side of the parts 37a, 37b is later than the end timing on the side of the special figure display parts 37a, 37b different from the hold information acquired this time, and the special figure display part to which the hold information acquired this time corresponds further The next game on the side of the special display 37a, 37b, which is the hold information that will be the next game start trigger on the 37a, 37b side, and the hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result is different from the hold information acquired this time. In the case of the hold information that triggers the start of the game, the end time of the game round is obtained this time for the duration of the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to this low probability winning result. Special symbol display section 37a corresponding to the suspension information, than the game time of the end timing of the current in 37b side is set to be the front.

  In addition, in the second adjustment process in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, for example, the hold information is acquired earlier than the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. First, the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired this time are prior to the game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. If it is unavoidable to start, the game times will be started in response to the hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result in the situation where the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired this time are being executed. An adjustment period is set as the duration of game times for each piece of hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126.

  In the second adjustment process in the case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the game times of the high-accuracy big hit results triggered by the hold information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is different from the hold information acquired this time, and the current acquisition 1st special figure reservation area 125 and 2nd special figure reservation area 126 so that the other game time may be started after one game time is completed after the game times of the high probability big hit result triggered by the held information. A period for adjustment is set as the duration of the game times for each piece of hold information stored in.

  However, in a situation where game times are not being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result Cannot be set for the adjustment period so that the above phenomenon occurs. In such a case, the second adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1607.

  When the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that results in a low probability hit result in a high probability state (step S1601: NO), the hold information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b that is different from the hold information acquired this time is high probability In the state, it is determined whether or not there is holding information that is a highly accurate winning result (step S1610). Specifically, when the hold information acquired this time is the first hold information, the second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 has a high-probability result in a high probability state. 2 If it is determined whether or not the hold information exists, and the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not there is first hold information that is a highly accurate winning result. In this determination, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. It is determined whether or not. And when it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information to be judged is read out, and the high probability jackpot result in which the numerical information is set in the distribution table It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is the highly probable winning result is the hold information that is the highly probable winning result in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state ( Step S1611).

  If the hold information that is a high-probability jackpot result is a hold information that is a jackpot result in both the normal gaming state and the high-probability state, after the game times of the low-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time, It is more advantageous for the player to start the game round with the high-accuracy big hit result. On the other hand, if the hold information that is a high-probability big hit result is a hold information that is a big win result if the probability status is high, the game times of the low-probability big hit result triggered by the hold information acquired this time are It is advantageous for the player to start in a situation where game times are being executed and invalidate the low probability winning result.

  Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1611, the third adjustment process is executed (step S1613) on condition that adjustment is possible (step S1612: YES). In the third adjustment process, in the situation in which the game times of the high-precision big hit results are being executed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b that are different from the hold information acquired this time, The adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times for each piece of the hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 so that the resulting game times are started. However, in the case where the hold information corresponding to the low probability winning result obtained this time is the hold information that is the next trigger for starting the game on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information, In the case where the current game times are not executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information, or in the case where the current game times are executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information. If the game times end timing is earlier than the game times end timing currently being executed on the special chart display units 37a and 37b, which is different from the hold information acquired this time, as described above. It is not possible to set an adjustment period for making a special event. In such a case, the third adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1612.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1611, the fourth adjustment process is executed (step S1615) on the condition that adjustment is possible (step S1614: YES). In the fourth adjustment process, after the game times of the low probability winning results corresponding to the currently acquired holding information are completed, the high probability winning results on the special chart display units 37a and 37b side different from the currently acquired holding information are handled. It is possible to set an adjustment period as the duration of game times for each piece of hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 so that the game times are started. In such a situation, such an adjustment period is set.

  Further, in the fourth adjustment process, for example, the hold information that triggers the start of the game times is acquired before the hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy large hit result on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. The game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy big win result must be started before the game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy big hit result acquired this time. If not, the first special figure reservation area is set so that the game times are started with the hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high probability big hit result are being executed. The adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times for each piece of hold information stored in 125 and the second special figure hold area 126.

  However, in a situation where game times are not being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result Cannot be set for the adjustment period so that the above phenomenon occurs. In such a case, the fourth adjustment process is not executed by making a negative determination in step S1614.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in one of the first hold information and the second hold information, the adjustment of the duration of the game is not performed, but the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result And the duration of the game times are adjusted on condition that both the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are acquired. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game times from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game times.

  Even if the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are acquired, the execution timing of each game time corresponding to the jackpot result cannot be set to a predetermined timing. If it is a situation, no adjustments are made to the duration of game times. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game times from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game times.

  Even if the hold information corresponding to the low probability big hit result is acquired as one of the first hold information and the second hold information and the hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result is acquired as the other, the high probability When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the hold information that is a jackpot result in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the high probability jackpot result after the game round corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is completed. The duration of the game times is adjusted so that the game times corresponding to are started. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the jackpot result is generated while maintaining the high probability mode.

<Another embodiment of the second embodiment>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the description of the second embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different form may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the second embodiment.

  -In the situation where the game times corresponding to the low probability big hit results are being executed, the hold information that is the big hit results even in the low probability mode was acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information that was the execution target of the game times. In such a case, the low probability is set so that the game times triggered by the hold information that is the big hit result even in the low probability mode are started after the game times corresponding to the currently executed low probability big hit results are completed. It is good also as a structure in which the period required until the game time started by the hold information which becomes a jackpot result also in mode is adjusted. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the jackpot result.

  -When the hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information that is the execution target of the game turn in the situation where the game turn corresponding to the high probability hit result is being executed The game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability big hit results are started so that the game times corresponding to the high-probable big hit results currently being executed are started. It is good also as a structure in which the period required until the game time started by the hold information corresponding to a probable winning result is adjusted. As a result, the high probability mode can be easily continued for a long time.

  The game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result among the first hold information and the second hold information is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. When the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed first ends in the situation where the game is executed, the opening / closing execution mode is started until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the loss result is to be executed are ended. Is not limited to the configuration in which the game information in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target, and the game time in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target is It may be configured to forcibly end and immediately start the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

  -In the situation where the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target are being executed, when the game times for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed are started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is handled as a result of disregarding regardless of the content, but the hold information on the different side is the execution target, although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the success / failure determination process A configuration may be adopted in which, when the game round ends, it is treated as an outlier result regardless of the execution result of the success / failure determination process.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA11 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area than the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below the upper area PA11. A left area PA12 that is a left area, a right area PA13 that is continuous to the lower area of the upper area PA11 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, a left area PA12, and a right area PA13. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA14 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 36.

  When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first shooting operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA11. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the left area PA12 → the lower area PA14. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, in the upper area PA11, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA12 of the left area PA12 and the right area PA13 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA13. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14.

  The lower area PA14 is provided with a first operation port 33 as in the first embodiment. However, the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in the present embodiment, a first special pitching device 131, a second special pitching device 132, a first through gate 133, and a second through gate 134 are provided. The first special pitching device 131, the second special pitching device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second through gate 134 are provided in the right area PA13 of the game area PA. In addition, a special prize winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA12 can win the first operating port 33, and the first special ball-throwing device 131, the second special ball-throwing device 132, the first through gate 133, the second Winning to the through gate 134 and the special electric prize winning device 32 is impossible. The game balls flowing down the right area PA13 can win the first special pitching device 131, the second special pitching device 132, the first through gate 133, the second through gate 134, and the special electric prize winning device 32, Winning to the first working port 33 is not possible. The number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first special ball entry device 131 is one, and one game ball has entered the second special ball entry device 132. In this case, the number of game balls to be paid out is one. However, these payout numbers may be different.

  The configuration of the first special pitching device 131 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the second special pitching device 132 is the same as that of the first special pitching device 131. FIG. 31A is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special ball entering device 131 in the non-accepting state. The first special pitching device 131 discharges the base unit 141 having a discharge passage 143 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24 and the game ball flowing down the game area PA. And a guiding unit 142 for guiding to the passage 143. The inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 has an opening area equal to or larger than one game ball, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 131a is provided on the outlet portion 143b side of the discharge passage 143, and a game ball that has won the first special ball entry device 131 is detected by the detection sensor 131a.

  The guide unit 142 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance portion 143a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 143 and into the discharge passage 143. In the situation where the guide driving unit 145 for displacing between the initial position where guidance of the game ball is impossible and the guidance position where the guidance is enabled, and the guide member 144 are arranged at the initial position, the discharge passage 143 A blocking member 146 disposed at a non-blocking position that does not block the inflow of game balls to the discharge passage 143 in a situation where the guide member 144 is disposed at the guiding position and the guide member 144 is disposed at the guiding position. It is equipped with. The guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 144 is positioned downward. A transmission unit 147 is provided so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 145 to the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146.

  When the guide driving unit 145 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 144 is disposed at the initial position and the blocking member 146 is disposed at the blocking position by a biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 143 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 143 by the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146, that is, the game ball is first The game area PA flows down without entering the special pitching device 131. Further, since the blocking member 146 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 becomes less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the first special ball entry device 131.

  When the guide driving unit 145 is in the driving state, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, so that the guide member 144 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 146 is non-blocking. Located in the blocking position. FIG. 31B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special pitching device 131 in the guiding state.

  When the guide member 144 is disposed at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 144 protrudes from the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 toward the game area PA. The amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive the game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance 143a in the game area PA from below. The top surface of the guide member 144 has an upper surface inclined downward toward the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143, so that the game ball received from below on the front end side of the guide member 144 is the upper surface of the guide member 144. To be guided into the discharge passage 143. In addition, when the blocking member 146 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 146 is displaced so that its tip is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 144. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 143 without interfering with the blocking member 146. As a result, when the guide drive unit 145 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 143a in the game area PA enters the first special ball entry device 131. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 144 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 146 is disposed at the blocking position is referred to as a closed state of the first special ball entry device 131. The state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the driving state, the guide member 144 is disposed in the guiding position, and the blocking member 146 is disposed in the non-blocking position is referred to as an open state of the first special ball entry device 131.

  The first special pitching device 131 includes a cover member 148 provided so as to face the inlet portion 143a of the discharge passage 143 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 148 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a passage portion 148a in the vertical direction in a region in front of the entrance portion 143a in the game area PA, and 1 game ball passing through the front region of the entrance portion 143a simultaneously. It is provided to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 143 of the first special pitching device 131 when the guidance unit 142 of the first special pitching device 131 is in the guidance state. In addition, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the inlet portion 143a into the discharge passage 143 in the guidance state.

  The first special pitching device 131 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the first through gate 133, and the second special pitching device 132 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the second through gate 134. Can be switched to. Specifically, when the first through gate 133 is won, the hold information on the first map side is acquired with the upper limit storage number (specifically, 4) as the upper limit. When the hold information on the first base map side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the first base unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is a region where the game ball does not pass in the game region PA, is used. A variation display of the pattern is performed in the general map display unit 135. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a win and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is terminated, the first special pitching device 131 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, the 1st general map holding | maintenance display part 136 is provided in the position adjacent to the 1st general map display part 135, and the number of the holding information of the 1st general map side by lighting of the 1st general map holding display part 136 is provided. Is displayed. Further, when a winning is made to the second through gate 134, the hold information on the second normal map side is acquired with the upper limit storage number (specifically, four) as the upper limit. When the hold information on the second map side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the second of the map unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. A change display of the pattern is performed in the general map display unit 137. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a win and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is terminated, the second special pitching device 132 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, the 2nd general map hold | maintenance display part 138 is provided in the position adjacent to the 2nd general map display part 137, and the number of the hold information by the 2nd general map side by lighting of the 2nd general map hold display part 138 is provided. Is displayed.

  In the right region PA13, a second through gate 134 is provided below the first through gate 133, and a first special pitching device 131 is provided below the second through gate 134. A second special pitching device 132 is provided below the ball device 131, and a special electric prize winning device 32 is provided below the second special pitching device 132. The first through gate 133, the second through gate 134, the first special ball entering device 131, and the second special ball entering device 132 are arranged such that the horizontal center at each entrance of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. Is arranged. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 133 in the vertical direction surely passes through the second through gate 134, and the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 134 is opened by the first special pitching device 131. If it is in the state, the first special pitching device 131 is reliably won regardless of the state of the second special pitching device 132, and the first special pitching device 131 is in the closed state and the second special pitching device 132. If it is in the open state, the second special winning device 132 is reliably won. If both the first special winning device 131 and the second special winning device 132 are closed, the special special winning device 32 is directed to. Flow down.

  The first hold information is acquired when a winning to the first working port 33 or the first special pitching device 131 occurs, and the second holding information when a winning to the second special pitching device 132 occurs. Is acquired. In this case, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is difficult for both the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 to be in the open state. Is a high probability state and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, both the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 are likely to be in an open state. In addition, when both the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 are in the open state winning state in the high probability state, the period when the first special pitching device 131 is in the open state and the second The periods during which the special pitching device 132 is in the open state are adjusted so as to deviate from the periods during which the special pitching device 132 is in the open state.

  According to the said structure, it becomes possible to set it as the structure by which both 1st pending | holding information and 2nd pending | holding information are easy to be acquired in a high probability state.

  Note that the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 are not limited to the configuration in which the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction. Although it is possible to aim for winning a prize and winning in the second special pitching device 132, the first special pitching device 131 and the second special pitching device 132 are shifted in the lateral direction. It is good also as a structure provided in. In this case, in the high probability state, the period during which the first special pitching device 131 is in the open state and the period during which the second special pitching device 132 is in the open state are not adjusted. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which both the first hold information and the second hold information are easily acquired in the high probability state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration using the gameability and the look-ahead result is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the contents of the success / failure table in this embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d).

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), in the success / failure table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. As in the first embodiment, the jackpot result is a success / failure result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize-winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and a transition trigger for the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition for both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, while triggering the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, the switch to the opening / closing execution mode is performed regardless of whether the result is a jackpot result or the small hit result, but the opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is The opening / closing mode of the special prize winning device 32 is different from the opening / closing execution mode executed when the winning result is obtained. Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit, as in the first embodiment. As described above, the round game is until a predetermined opening continuation period elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize device 32 until one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues. In this case, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. , The opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special prize apparatus 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than one game ball will win. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are The open / closed number regulation mode is terminated when one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. The opening duration of the special prize winning device 32 in the open / close number regulation mode is longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds), and the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number (specifically 10). The opening / closing number regulation period is shorter than the product of. In this pachinko machine 10, since the number of opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to one, the one opening continuation period is set as the above-mentioned opening / closing number regulation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the plurality of opening continuation periods is the above-mentioned opening / closing number regulation. It is good also as a structure set to the use period. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulating period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the number of players can be increased although the number is smaller than the opening / closing execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained.

  As the success / failure table, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the first special figure used for the judgment of the validity of the first holding information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. And a second special figure success / failure table used for determining whether or not the second holding information stored in the second special figure execution area 127b is successful. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different success / failure tables for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / failure lottery mode in the determination of success / failure. Existing.

  Specifically, each of the success / failure tables will be described. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the low probability table for the first special figure has two random number values (for example, “5” and “305” as the jackpot result). )), And other values are random numbers resulting in outliers. In other words, when the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the success / failure determination is made for the first hold information, the outcome may not be the jackpot result, although it may be either the jackpot result or the missed result.

  In the high probability table for the first special figure, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot result is set larger than that in the low probability table for the first special figure. Specifically, there are 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305” ”,“ 334 ”,“ 365 ”,“ 392 ”,“ 420 ”,“ 470 ”,“ 495 ”,“ 520 ”,“ 558 ”,“ 575 ”,“ 599 ”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. The other random number values are random number values that result in outliers. In other words, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first hold information, the jackpot result or the lost result is not a small hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), in the low probability table for the second special figure, the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot result is the same as that in the low probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, a random number value other than the random number resulting in the jackpot result is a random number value resulting in the jackpot result. In other words, when the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the success / failure determination process is performed on the second hold information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. However, although details will be described later, there may occur a situation in which the second hold information triggers the start of a game round, but the determination process for the second hold information may not be executed, but in this situation, the second hold information Information is treated as an outlier.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot result is the same as in the case of the high probability table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, a random number value other than the random number resulting in the jackpot result is a random number value resulting in the jackpot result. That is, when the winning / no-win lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second hold information, either the big hit result or the small hit result is obtained. However, although details will be described later, there may occur a situation in which the second hold information triggers the start of a game round, but the determination process for the second hold information may not be executed, but in this situation, the second hold information Information is treated as an outlier.

  As described above, when the second hold information is a trigger for the success / failure determination, a structure that can generate a small hit result is generated, and a winning to the second operating port 34 is generated to deal with the small hit result. The open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is generated, the player can slightly increase the ball.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  In the configuration in which the contents of the success / failure table are different between the first hold information and the second hold information as described above, the contents of the distribution table are the first hold information and the second hold as in the first embodiment. The information is the same. In the first embodiment, there are two types of support modes, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. However, in the present embodiment, there is only one type of support mode. Accordingly, the probability that the power transmission open state is won in the power distribution open lottery process using the power transmission random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period when the variable display of the pattern is executed in the general map display unit 38a are as follows. It is constant regardless of the gaming state, and is the number of times that the utility wire 34a is in the open state in the open state of the general power, one open period of the general power feature 34a, and in the open state of the general power feature 34a. In the case where the open state occurs a plurality of times, the execution mode of the drive control of the universal utility 34a such as the closing period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is also constant regardless of the game state It is. Thereby, since it is not necessary to change the display control mode of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the drive control mode of the general utility 34a according to the type of the support mode, the program capacity for executing these controls In addition, the data capacity can be reduced. Since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in the present embodiment is a probability that the winning / raising lottery mode has a high probability. It is a gaming state that is a mode.

  In the first embodiment, the second special figure reservation area 126 is provided with first to fourth areas 126a to 126d, and a plurality of pieces of second reservation information can be stored. In the embodiment, the number of second hold information that can be stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is one. And it is a case where it is not the situation where game time is being performed in the 2nd special figure display part 37b, Comprising: The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in any special figure display part 37a, 37b is performed When a win to the second operating port 34 occurs when the situation is not the situation, the second reservation information is directly stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, and the game times are executed in the second special figure display section 37b. 2nd hold information is not acquired even if the winning to the 2nd operation port 34 occurs in the situation where the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the game time in the special situation display part 37a, 37b is executed. . Thereby, in a situation where the game turn can be started in the second special figure display part 37b, the player who wants to start the game turn in the second special figure display part 37b goes to the second operation port 34 each time. It is necessary to perform a launch operation aiming for a prize.

  In a configuration in which there is only one type of support mode, the setting mode of the duration of game times is made different between the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, so that the second in the normal gaming state. The game times execution frequency in the special figure display unit 37b is lower than the game times execution frequency in the first special figure display unit 37a. Hereinafter, the setting mode of the duration of game times will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the normal game state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 33, if the result of the determination process is a result of losing and the time is completely out of reach where the reach effect does not occur, the upper limit number (specifically, in the first special figure reservation area 125). 4), when a new game is started in a situation where the first hold information is stored, 2 seconds is selected as the duration of the game, and the upper limit number is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125. When a new game time is started in a situation where the first hold information is not stored, one of 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds is selected as the duration of the game time. In addition, in the normal setting mode, when the result of the success / failure determination process is a disapproval result, either in the case of a disapproval reach where a reach effect occurs or in the case where the result of the correct / incorrect determination process is a jackpot result, Is selected as one of 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes. In this case, it is easier to select a longer duration for the big hit than for the outreach and the average duration selected is longer for the big hit than for the outreach.

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the setting mode of the duration of game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, the duration of the selected game times is only one type, and the duration of the one type of game times regardless of whether the target game times are determined or not. Is selected. The duration of the selected game times is 10 minutes. The variable display period is longer than 2 minutes, which is the duration of the longest game time selected in the normal selection mode. Thereby, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is lower than the execution frequency of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a.

  In the high probability state, the setting mode of the duration of game times is different from the normal game state. Specifically, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is one type regardless of whether or not the reach effect is generated when the result of the success / failure determination process is an outlier result. Only one type is selected as a selection target even when the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result. In this case, the duration of the game times in the case of a jackpot result is set longer than the duration of the game times in the case of a loss result, specifically, the duration of the game times in the case of a loss result The duration of the game is 30 seconds when the jackpot result is 10 seconds.

  In the high probability state, the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or when the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result. If the second hold information is handled as an off-result as a result of the second hold information triggering the game in the running state, only one type is selected and the result of the success / failure determination process is the jackpot result In this case, only one type is selected. Specifically, the duration of game times in the case of a small hit result or a case of being treated as a loss result is 1 second, whereas the duration of game times in the case of a big hit result is 1 minute 30 seconds It has become.

  Here, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. It is set to a period shorter than the duration of the game times selected in the game times. In addition, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability state. The continuation of any game times that is set to a period shorter than the duration of the selected game times and that can be selected in the game times triggered by the first hold information or the second hold information in the normal game state A period shorter than the period is set. That is, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is shorter than the duration of the game times in any other cases. Is set. As a result, it is possible to shorten the game period digestion period triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state, and the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode per unit time triggered by the small hit result The number of times can be increased.

  On the other hand, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit results in the high probability state. Not only longer than the duration of the game times selected in the game times to be set, but also set to a period longer than the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability state Has been. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot result will occur in the game times triggered by the second hold information.

  Next, how the game progresses in each of the normal game state and the high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 34 (a) shows the period of high probability, FIG. 34 (b) shows the duration of game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the second special figure display. FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the execution of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result. Indicates the period.

  In the normal game state, as already described, the setting mode of the game duration duration in the second special figure display unit 37b is the long-term setting mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a plurality of game times are started on the first special figure display section 37a including each of the timings t1, t3, t4, t5 and t7. In the meantime, in the second special figure display section 37b, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the game times are executed only once from the timing t2 to the timing t6. In this way, in the normal gaming state, the game frequency execution frequency in the first special figure display unit 37a is higher than the game frequency execution frequency in the second special figure display unit 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game turn in the first special figure display section 37a started at the timing of t7 ends at the timing of t8. In this case, since the first hold information that triggers the start of the game round corresponds to the highly probable big hit result, the jackpot result is obtained as shown in FIG. The opening / closing execution mode is triggered. Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t9. As described above, since the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a highly probable jackpot result, the gaming state shifts to the high probability state at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. Further, since the first hold information is held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 at the timing of t9 and the second hold information is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, at the timing of the t9. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are started, and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are started as shown in FIG. 34 (c).

  The game times in the first special figure display section 37a started at the timing of t9 will continue until the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 34 (b), but between the timing of t9 and the timing of t17, 2. The game times in the special figure display section 37b are executed a plurality of times, and after each game time, an opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result. That is, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the game times in the second special figure display section 37b are executed such as the timing of t9 to the timing of t10, the timing of t12 to the timing of t13, and the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Since each game time is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the timing from t10 to the timing from t11, the timing from t13 to the timing from t14, and the timing from t16 The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, such as timing to timing t18. In this case, while the duration of the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a which is a result of losing in the high probability state is set to 10 seconds, the second special figure which is a small hit result in the high probability state. The duration of the game times on the display unit 37b is set to 1 second, and the duration of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the high probability state, the game times and the small hit results of the second special figure display unit 37b, which are the small hit results, while the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a, which is the outlier result, are executed once. The combination of opening / closing execution modes triggered by this can occur three to four times.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), as shown in FIG. 34 (d), at the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t16, which is the situation in which game times are being executed in the first special figure display section 37a. The opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is compared with the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started after waiting for the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a to end. It is possible to increase the execution frequency per unit time.

  After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a game turn in the first special figure display unit 37a is newly started. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), at the timing t20, which is the situation in which the game times are being executed, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are started and the game times are ended at time t21. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result. The opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t22.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t23, which is the situation where the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t19 are continued, the game in the second special figure display unit 37b as shown in FIG. 34 (c). Times are started. The game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Thereafter, at the timing of t24, the game turn in the first special figure display unit 37a is completed as shown in FIG. 34 (b), and at the subsequent timing of t25, the second special figure is displayed as shown in FIG. 34 (c). The game round in the figure display part 37b is complete | finished. Then, at the timing of t25, as shown in FIG. 34 (e), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result.

  Next, a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special figure special power control process in the present embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82, and FIG. 36 is the second special figure special electric control process in the present embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82. It is a flowchart which shows. The first special chart special power control process is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), and the second special chart special power control process is executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), first the first hold information acquisition process is executed (step S1701). In the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), first, the second hold information acquisition process is executed (step S1801).

  In the first hold information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 (a), a winning to the first working port 33 has occurred (step S1901: YES), and further in the first special figure hold area 125. If the number of stored first hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1902: YES), in steps S1903 and S1904, the same as in steps S503 and S504 in the first embodiment, 1 Processing for acquiring the hold information is executed. Thereafter, a hold command selection process is executed (step S1905). Although details will be described later in the selection process of the hold command, a process for selecting the first hold command corresponding to the content of the first hold information acquired this time is executed. Then, the first hold command selected in step S1905 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S1906). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, whereby the number of the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. Change the display to correspond to the increase in the number of holds.

  In the second hold information acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 (b), the game is not being executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, and any special figure display is performed. This is a case where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game times in the sections 37a, 37b is not being executed (step S2001: NO), and further, when a winning to the second operating port 34 has occurred (step S2002) : YES), the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. As a result, the second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The acquired second hold information immediately triggers the start of game times in the second special figure display section 37b.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 35) and the second special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 36), after executing the holding information acquisition process (step S1701 or step S1801), By executing the same processing as in steps S302 to S304 and S402 to S404 in each of the embodiments in steps S1702 to S1704 and steps S1802 to S1804, it corresponds to the value of the corresponding special figure special electricity counter. Jump to processing. In this case, in the first special figure special electric control process, when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1705) is executed, and the first special figure special electric counter is executed. When the value of “1” is “1”, the special figure changing process (step S 1706) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special electricity counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S 1707). ) Is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special power counter is “3”, the special electric power start process (step S1708) is the execution target, and the value of the first special figure special electric power counter is “4” The special electric open process (step S1709) is the execution target, and when the value of the first special figure special electric counter is “5”, the special electric power closing process (step S1710) is the execution target, and the first special figure special electric charge is executed. The counter value is Electrically movable device control end process (step S1711) is executed if a ". Further, in the second special figure special power control process, when the value of the second special figure special power counter is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1805) is executed, and the value of the second special figure special electric power counter is set. Is “1”, the special figure changing process (step S1806) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S1807) is executed. When the second special figure special power counter value is “3”, the special power start process (step S1808) is the execution target, and when the second special figure special power counter value is “4”. The special power open process (step S1809) is an execution target. If the value of the second special figure special power counter is “5”, the special power close processing (step S1810) is the execution target. The value is “6” Becomes the execution target electrically movable device control end process (step S1811). If that, processing small hit (step S1812) is executed when the value of the second special electrically movable device control counter is "7".

  Among the above-described processes, the special-fluctuating process (steps S1706 and S1806), the special-electricity opening process (steps S1709 and S1809), and the special-electricity closing process (steps S1710 and S1810) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Since it is the same, explanation is omitted. Processing other than these will be described below.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process executed in step S1705 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1805 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

  In the special figure variation start process, it is first determined whether or not the big hit state process is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) (step S2101). As already described, in the pachinko machine 10, even when the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game times can be executed on the other side. In this case, step S2101 is executed, and if the big hit state process is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 35 and 36), the processes after step S2102 are executed. The start of a new game is restricted. As a result, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed in response to the game hit of the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game turn on the other side is newly started. It is regulated not to be. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the value of the first special figure special electric counter is any of “3” to “6”. If it is determined in step S2101, and if any of “3” to “6”, the processing after step S2102 is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a as a trigger, no new game times are started in the second special figure display unit 37b.

  On the other hand, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), it is determined whether or not the value of the second special figure special electric counter is any of “3” to “6”. If it is determined in S2101 and it is any one of “3” to “6”, the processing after step S2102 is not executed, whereas the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “7”. Executes the processing from step S2102 onward. When the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “7”, the small hitting process (step S1812) is executed as described above, but the small hitting process will be described in detail later. A process for controlling execution of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. That is, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are not started in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b being executed. This is started in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the game times corresponding to the small hit result in the figure display unit 37b as an opportunity. Thereby, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of game times in the first special figure display unit 37a.

  By the way, the shortest duration of the game times executed in the first special figure display unit 37a is set to a period longer than the longest period required for the opening / closing execution mode to end with the small hit result. Yes. Therefore, even if the game times are started in the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the small hit result as an opportunity, the game times are executed with the small hit result as an opportunity. Exit after the mode ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the corresponding holding number is one or more (step S2102). If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the first holding information are stored in the first special figure holding area 125. If it is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of the second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, data setting processing is executed (step S2103). If this time is the special figure variation start process in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the processing content of the data setting process is the same as that in step S703 in the first embodiment. If this time is the special figure fluctuation start process in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), the data setting process has shifted to the execution area 127b for the second special figure stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. Later, the second special figure reservation area 126 is cleared to “0”.

  After the data setting process is executed, the game times are executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) and the game as in step S704 in the first embodiment. It is determined whether the hold information that triggered the start of the transaction corresponds to the jackpot result (step S2104). If a negative determination is made in step S2104, a success / failure determination process is executed (step S2105).

  In the winner determination process, if the winner / rejection lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game turn start target is the first special figure display unit 37a, the first special figure low-probability table (see FIG. 32A) is used. When the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the game turn start target is the first special figure display unit 37a, the high-probability decision table for the first special figure (see FIG. 32 (b)). Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game turn start target is the second special figure display unit 37b, the low special possibility table for the second special figure (see FIG. 32 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, a high probability decision table for the second special figure (FIG. 32D) Read) from the main ROM 83. After reading the success / failure table, for the determination of success / failure from the hold information stored on the start side of the current game round in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table. In addition, when the start of the current game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, if it does not coincide with the numerical information set as the jackpot result, it is set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information.

  When the determination result is a jackpot result (step S2106: YES), the processing from step S2107 to step S2109 is executed in the same manner as step S707 to step S709 in the first embodiment. When the result of the success / failure determination process is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S2106: NO, step S2110: YES), “1” is set to the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2111). As already described, the small hit result does not occur on the first special figure display unit 37a side, but only on the second special figure display unit 37b side. Thereafter, stop result setting processing for the small hit result is executed (step S2112). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. Then, the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S2110: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S2113). Specifically, in the current game round, information on the pattern form that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the pattern mode information selected in the case of the jackpot result. It is a common type in the special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, that is, the game times are being executed on the side that does not correspond to the current special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36), and the hold that triggered the game times is started. If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the above-described stop result setting process for the outlier result is executed without executing the success / failure determination process (step S2113). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the game times can be started on the other side even if the game times are being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. However, if the hold information that triggered the start of the already-executed game times corresponds to any jackpot result, the newly executed game times will have the hold information that triggered the start of the game times. Regardless of whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result, it becomes the game times corresponding to the outlier result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot result from being executed repeatedly. In addition, when the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed, in the case of a configuration in which the start of a new game time is prevented, the hold information that is the start target of the game times is acquired. Regardless, there is a risk that it will become clear that the currently executed game times are game times corresponding to the jackpot result, but the game times corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed. Even if it is the case, it becomes possible to prevent such an event from occurring by adopting a configuration in which a new game round can be started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even when game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37 a, opening and closing triggered by the game times of the small hit result in the second special figure display unit 37 b An execution mode can be initiated. In this case, in the situation where the game number corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, even if the second hold information corresponding to the result of the small hit results in the start of the game number The game times triggered by the second hold information is a result of losing. This makes it possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being triggered by the small hit result while the game times corresponding to the big hit result are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a. . In addition to this configuration, as already described, the shortest duration of the game times executed in the first special figure display unit 37a is the longest time required for the opening / closing execution mode to end with the small hit result. Since the period is set to be longer than the period, even if the game times are started in the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed in response to the small hit result, It ends after the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result. Therefore, the situation where the opening / closing execution mode should be executed triggered by the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a overlaps with the situation where the opening / closing execution mode should be executed triggered by the small hit result in the special figure display unit 37b. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. In addition, when the process of step S2104 is executed, as in the first embodiment, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode should be executed triggered by the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37b The situation in which the opening / closing execution mode should be executed in response to the jackpot result in is not generated. That is, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in the first special figure display unit 37a is overlapped with the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in the second special figure display unit 37b overlaps. Therefore, it has a configuration that does not occur.

  When the process of step S2109, step S2112 or step S2113 is executed, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S2114). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation display period specifying process. In the variable display period specifying process, it is first determined whether or not the hold information that is the current start target is the first hold information and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S2201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, a lottery process for the variable display period is executed (step S2202). In the lottery process for the variable display period, processes similar to those in steps S802 to S804 in the first embodiment are executed. Thereby, as already explained, the duration of the game times is selected according to the normal setting mode, and the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game times is set as the variable display period.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, a variable display period readout process is executed (step S2203). In the read process, if the hold information that is the start target this time is the first hold information and the current gaming state is a high probability state, the result of the success / failure determination process is 10 seconds. Is read from the main ROM 83, and when the result of the determination process is a jackpot result, information for 30 seconds is read from the main ROM 83. Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the read game time continuation period is defined as a variable display period. In this case, when it is a disengagement result, no reach effect is generated in the decoration area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41, and when it is a jackpot result, the decoration region of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. 43 and the first individual display area 45 generate a reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the result is a losing result, the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the reach effect is executed by the main MPU 82 or the sound light side MPU 93, In such a case, a reach effect may be generated.

  In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information that is the current start target is the second hold information and the current gaming state is a high probability state, the result of the success / failure determination process is a small hit result Alternatively, when the second hold information is handled as a result of losing, the information for 1 second is read from the main ROM 83, and when the result of the determination process is a jackpot result, the information for 1 minute 30 seconds is read from the main ROM 83. . Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the read game time continuation period is defined as a variable display period. In this case, the reach effect does not occur in the decoration area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41 in the case of the small hit result, and in the case of the big hit result, the decoration of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A reach effect occurs in the area 43 and the first individual display area 45. In addition, when the duration of the game times is different from 1 second, the variable display of the symbols in the regions 43 to 45 and 47 of the symbol display device 41 is sequentially stopped in the order of left → right → middle. On the other hand, when the duration of the game is 1 second, the symbols G11 to G13 are simultaneously stopped and displayed in the second individual display area 47 of the symbol display device 41, and the symbols G11 to G11 at that time are displayed. The combination of G13 is a combination corresponding to the small hit result (for example, “3 · 4 · 1”). Thereby, even if the duration of the game times in the case of the small hit result is shorter than in other cases, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the small hit result has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the result is a small hit result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of the symbols is sequentially stopped.

  In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information that is the start target this time is the second hold information and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the result of the success / failure determination process is any result. Also, 10 minutes of information is read from the main ROM 83. Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the read game time continuation period is defined as a variable display period. In this case, if the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result, the game time elapsed period corresponding to the jackpot result is the game number when the first hold information is triggered when the game state is the normal game state. The reach effect is started in the additional decoration area 44 of the symbol display device 41 when the reference period exceeds 9 minutes, which is longer than the maximum duration that can be selected. On the other hand, when the result of the determination process is a small hit result, the reach effect is not generated in the additional decoration area 44 of the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the information of the variable display period specified by any of these processes is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2204). Thereby, the setting of the variable display period of the game times that are the current start targets is completed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 38), after executing the change display period specifying process, the processes in steps S2115 to S2117 are executed in the same manner as steps S712 to S714 in the first embodiment. To do. Thereby, a new game round will be started.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process executed in step S1707 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1807 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

  First, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed (step S2301). When the final stop period has elapsed (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether or not an opportunity to shift the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state has occurred, and the opportunity has occurred Executes processing for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state (steps S2302 to S2305). This process will be described later.

  When the processes of steps S2302 to S2305 are executed and the current game time is a game time corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2306: YES), the current process is the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and if the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36), the second special figure. The value of the special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S2307). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter to be added by adding 1 is designated as a special electricity start process (step S1708). , “3” corresponding to step S1808).

  When the processing from step S2302 to step S2305 is executed, and the current game time is a game time in the second special figure display unit 37b and a game time corresponding to the small hit result (step S2308: YES) Then, 5 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter (step S2309). Since the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the second special figure special electric counter is incremented by 5 to make a small hitting process (step S1812). “7” corresponding to

  When the processing of step S2302 to step S2305 is executed, and the current game time is a game time that does not correspond to either the big hit result or the small win result (step S2308: NO), the current processing is the first If the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) is supported, the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to “0”, and the current process corresponds to the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36). If so, the value of the second special figure special electricity counter is cleared to "0" (step S2310). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process executed in step S1708 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1808 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

  If it is before the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S2401: YES), the value of the special figure special counter on the side not corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) at this time By determining whether or not is “0”, the game times are being executed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side not corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) of this time. It is determined whether or not the situation is present (step S2402). If the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side not corresponding to the special figure special electric control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) is not “0” (step S2402: NO), the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is. The process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the special figure display on the side where the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed When the game times in the units 37a and 37b are finished first, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the game times in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game times have not been finished yet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game times being executed from being forcibly terminated at the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game times are being executed. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being started.

  By the way, as already explained, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b, the game time in the other Is a configuration that is not newly started. By providing the configuration and the configuration of step S2402, the game times are not executed in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Therefore, in a situation where game times are being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the game times, and in a situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the open / close execution mode. It becomes.

  Information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result when the value of the special figure special electric counter on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 35, FIG. 36) is “0” (step S2402: YES). (Specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode (step S2403). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2404). Thereby, the effect corresponding to an opening period is performed in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 64, and the speaker part 65. FIG.

  If it is after the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S2401: NO), opening / closing triggered by the jackpot result on the condition that the opening period has passed (step S2405: YES) A process for starting the execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, a round number setting process is executed (step S2406). In the setting process, “15” is set to the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 84. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the remaining number of executions of the round game by the main MPU 82. After that, information (specifically 29 seconds) of the open period of the round game is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter to be controlled (step S2407), and one round is given to the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84. Information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electricity winning device 32 in the game is set (step S2408). Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S2409). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in an open state. Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1, and the present process is the second special special electric control process ( If it corresponds to FIG. 36), 1 is added to the value of the second special figure special electricity counter. When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”. Therefore, the value of the special figure special electricity counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special electricity release process (step S1709, It becomes "4" corresponding to step S1809).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special electric power end process executed in step S1711 in the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1811 in the second special electric figure special electric control process (FIG. 36).

  When the ending period set in the special electricity release process (steps S1709 and S1809) has elapsed (step S2501: YES), a game state setting process is executed. In the game state setting process, when “1” is set in the first high probability winning flag or the second high probability winning flag in the main RAM 84 (step S2502: YES), the current opening / closing execution mode is started. Since it means that the big hit result that has been triggered is a high probability big hit result, the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to “1” (step S2503) and the game provided in the main RAM 84 “60” is set in the number counter (step S2504).

  The high probability flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the high-precision jackpot result ends, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result does not occur, and the end reference count (specifically 60 times) When the game times are executed, the gaming state is shifted from the high probability state to the normal gaming state. The game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of end reference times.

  Here, the process for specifying the trigger for shifting the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state is executed in steps S2302 to S2305 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 40). Specifically, when the final stop period of the current game time has elapsed (step S2301: YES), if the value of the game number counter is 1 or more (step S2302: YES), the value of the game number counter is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S2303). When the value of the game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2304: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S2305). Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

  Returning to the description of the special electric power end processing (FIG. 42), when the jackpot result that triggered the start of the current opening / closing execution mode is the low probability jackpot result (step S2502: NO), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “0”. "Is cleared (step S2505), and the game number counter in the main RAM 84 is cleared to" 0 "(step S2506). As a result, the gaming state after the current opening / closing execution mode becomes the normal gaming state.

  When the process of step S2504 or step S2506 is executed, a clear process is executed (step S2507). As a result, among the first high-accuracy big hit flag, the second high-precision big hit flag, the first low-precision big hit flag, and the second low-precision big hit flag in the main RAM 84, the flag set to “1” is cleared to “0”. At the same time, various flags and various counters used in the current opening / closing execution mode are cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, if the current process corresponds to the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special electric counter is cleared to “0”, and the present process is the second special figure special electric control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 36), the value of the second special figure special counter is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hitting process executed in step S1812 in the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 43).

  If the current processing time is the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: YES), information on the opening continuation period of the opening / closing number regulation mode is stored in the second special figure special electricity timer counter (specifically, Is set to 1.8 seconds) (step S2602), and information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing number defining mode is stored in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. Set (step S2603). Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S2604). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in an open state.

  If the current processing time is not the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: NO), on the condition that the special electric prize winning device 32 has been won (step S2605: YES). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 84 (step S2606). If the value of the winning counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S2607: YES), a process for ending the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. In addition, even when the prize winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 has not occurred (step S2605: NO) or the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 84 is not “0” (step S2607: NO), the second Even when the special figure special electric timer counter value is “0” and the open / close number regulation mode open duration has elapsed (step S2608: YES), the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is terminated. Execute the process to make it happen.

  In the process for ending the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, first, a special electricity closing setting process is executed (step S2609). In the closing setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in a closed state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in a closed state. Thereafter, after clearing the small hit flag of the main RAM 84 by “0” (step S2610), the value of the second special figure special counter is cleared by “0” (step S2611). As a result, the value of the second special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S1805).

  Next, the structure for performing various alert | reports using the prefetch of hold information is demonstrated.

  As already explained, when the second hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process, if the big hit result is not achieved, the small hit result is obtained. By shifting to a certain opening / closing execution mode, winning to the special electricity winning device 32 may occur. And even if it is the situation where game times are being executed in one of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b, the game time can be started on the other side, and the gaming state When the game is in a high probability state, the duration of the game times when the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is the start time is 1 second which is the shortest period, and the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number regulation mode Is started even in a situation where game times are being executed in the first special figure display section 37a. Thereby, in the high probability state, the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number regulation mode is repeated in a short period of time, and the player is given out by paying out the game ball by winning a prize to the special prize device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number regulation mode. The number of game balls possessed by will increase.

  In this case, the high probability state ends when 60 game times that are the end reference number are executed without generating a jackpot result. Then, if a jackpot result occurs in the middle of the high probability state, the game number corresponding to the jackpot result is started and more game times are generated in the second special figure display unit 37b, so that the number of opening / closing is specified. It is advantageous for the player to generate more mode opening / closing execution modes. On the other hand, even if the hold information is a jackpot result if it is a target of the success / failure determination process in a high probability state, it may not be a jackpot result if it is a target of the success / failure determination process in a low probability state. Then, in such a situation where the first hold information is acquired, if the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are repeatedly generated and the number of times of game times in the high probability state is set as the end reference number, 1 The profit of the jackpot result triggered by the hold information will be lost. Therefore, in such a case, the game times triggered by the first hold information is executed when the number of times of execution of the game times in the high probability state becomes the end reference number of times or immediately before that, It becomes possible to maximize the profit of the player.

  Under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first hold information is newly acquired in the high probability state, whether or not the first hold information corresponds to the jackpot result at the acquired timing. Read ahead. And when it is specified that it corresponds to the jackpot result, in order to stop the launch of the game ball in relation to the content of the first hold information and the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state Notification or notification for prompting the launch of a game ball is executed. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for executing such notification will be specifically described. Note that the prefetching as described above is not executed for the second hold information.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a hold command selection process executed by the main MPU 82. The hold command selection process is executed in step S1905 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37).

  First, it is determined whether or not the first hold information acquired this time is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 among the first hold information acquired this time is read out, and the high probability for the first special figure which is a determination table in which the numerical information is referred to in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. That is, the high-probability table is referred to regardless of whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the high probability state. As already described, all types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that are jackpot results in the high probability table. In this case, in step S2701, the first hold information acquired this time is determined by referring to the high probability determination table for the first special figure to determine whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result. It is determined whether any of the probability states corresponds to the jackpot result.

  When the acquired first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701: YES), the first hold information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure hold area 125 “1” is set to the jackpot holding flag provided in the area where “is stored” (step S2702). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, each of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 includes a hit random number area, a big hit type area, and a reach random number area. A big hit hold flag is provided separately, but unlike the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are not provided with a duration area and a set flag.

  Thereafter, on condition that the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S2703: YES), it is determined whether or not the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result are being executed ( Step S2704). If the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed (step S2704: YES), the prefetch notification is not executed. As already described, the hold information that triggers the start of game times in a situation where the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed is handled as corresponding to the missed result without executing the success / failure determination process. Therefore, in the situation where the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result have already been executed, even if the game times triggered by the second hold information are newly started, Profits are not surely generated. In this case, in order to stop the launch of the game ball by not performing the pre-read notification during the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result as described above. It is possible to prevent the notification and the notification for encouraging the release of the game ball (hereinafter, these notifications are also referred to as notifications corresponding to the prefetched results) from being executed meaninglessly.

  If the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the big hit result are not being executed (step S2704: NO), the big special is held in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 It is determined whether there are two or more areas in which “1” is set in the flag (step S2705). If there are two or more areas where the jackpot hold flag is set to “1”, the first hold information that triggers the start of the game times before the first hold information acquired this time corresponds to the jackpot result Means that In this case, there is a possibility that the notification corresponding to the prefetch result has already been executed at the timing when the first hold information of the jackpot result that becomes the trigger for starting the game round is acquired. In such a situation, if the notification corresponding to the prefetch result is executed triggered by the first hold information that triggers the start of game times later, the player may be confused. Moreover, even if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result has not been executed for the first holding information of the jackpot result that triggers the start of the game round first, the first holding information of the jackpot result that triggers the starting of the gaming round ahead Regardless of the situation, if the notification corresponding to the prefetch result is executed triggered by the first hold information that triggers the start of the game later, the notification corresponding to the prefetch result of the content that does not match the current situation is executed. There is a possibility that. On the other hand, when there are two or more areas where “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience from occurring by not performing the pre-read notification. It becomes.

  Corresponding to the jackpot result when there is only one area where the jackpot hold flag is set to “1” among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 (step S2705: NO) This means that the first hold information to be is only the first hold information acquired this time. In this case, a process of enabling pre-read notification after step S2706 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 is grasped (step S2706). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter in the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number (step S2707). As already explained, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the losing result in the high probability state is fixed at 10 seconds. In addition, the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state is fixed at 1 second, and the opening / closing number regulation mode executed when the small hit result is obtained The duration of the opening / closing execution mode is fixed at 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the duration of the game times triggered by the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of pieces of first hold information grasped in step S2706 and the first hold information corresponding to the result of losing in the high probability state (specifically “10”). ) And the first special figure display unit 37a, if a game round is being executed, the remaining duration of the game round is added to the product result to calculate the reference period. Then, the reference period is set to the duration period (specifically “1”) of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state and the opening / closing execution mode which becomes the opening / closing number regulation mode. Divide by the result of the sum of the duration (specifically “1.8”). If there is no remainder as a result of the division, if the game times are being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the “quotient value resulting from the division” is set to “first special figure reservation area”. If the result obtained by adding the “number of first hold information stored in 125” is a reference number and the game is not being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, “the quotient value based on the result of the division” The result obtained by adding “a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 125” to the reference number. On the other hand, if there is a remainder as a result of the division and the game is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, “the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient by the result of the division” If the result obtained by adding the “number of first hold information stored in one special figure reservation area 125” is a reference number and the game is not being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, “the result of the above division” The result obtained by adding “the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 125” to the “value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient by” is the reference number. In the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b until the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time as the reference number calculated as described above It is the maximum number of game times that can be started. When the value of the game number counter in the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number, the game number is started when the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state is triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time This means that it is less than the maximum number of game times that can be started on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b until the game is executed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, whether or not the first holding information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time is the holding information that results in a jackpot result in either the normal gaming state or the high probability state. Determination is made (step S2708). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 among the first hold information acquired this time is read, and the low probability of use for the first special figure, which is a determination table for referring to the numerical information in the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. As already explained, since the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low probability table is included in the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high probability table, the low probability result for the first special figure is shown. The hold information corresponding to the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the success / failure table is a jackpot result regardless of whether in the normal gaming state or the high probability state.

  If the first hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a jackpot result regardless of whether in the normal game state or the high probability state, the first hold information does not trigger the start of the game times in the high probability state. Even a jackpot result will occur. Therefore, in such a case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2708 so that the processing in step S2709 and step S2710 is not executed, so that the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state corresponds to the jackpot result obtained this time. Even if it is less than the maximum number of game times of the second special figure display part 37b that can be started by the time when the game time triggered by the first hold information is started, the launch of the game ball is stopped. In order to prevent this, the notification is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification for stopping the launch of the game ball from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to stop the launch of the game ball.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2708, a notification count calculation process is executed (step S2709). Specifically, if the game number is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the “first special figure storage area 125 stores the first hold” from “the value of the game number counter in the main RAM 84”. A value obtained by subtracting the “number of information” is calculated as the current number of notifications. If the game number is not being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the value of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is determined from the “value of the game number counter in the main RAM 84”. A value obtained by subtracting “a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number” is calculated as the current notification count.

  Thereafter, a hold command for notifying the number of times in which the calculated information on the number of notifications is set is set as a first hold command to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2710). The first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). As will be described in detail later, the sound light side MPU 93 receives the second notification in the range of the number of notifications set in the hold command for number notification when the number notification hold command is received as the first hold command. The notification indicating that the launch of the game ball should be stopped is executed so as to stop execution of the game times on the display unit 37b.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2707 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2708, whether or not the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time is hold information that is a low-accuracy big hit result is determined. Determination is made (step S2711). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 among the first hold information acquired this time is read, and the numerical information is one of the numerical information of the low-accuracy big hit results set in the distribution table. Determine whether you are doing it. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2711, the firing promotion hold command is set as the first hold command to be transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S2712). The first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). The sound light side MPU 93 will be described in detail later, but when receiving the firing promotion hold command as the first hold command, the game ball of the game ball is executed as many times as possible in the second special figure display unit 37b. A notification for prompting the launch is executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2703, an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, or a negative determination is made in step S2711, a normal hold command is sent to the sound-side MPU 93. Is set as the first hold command to be transmitted (step S2713). The first hold command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). As will be described in detail later, the sound light side MPU 93, when receiving the normal hold command as the first hold command, performs notification to indicate that the number of hold of the first hold information has increased.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a pending command handling process executed by the display side MPU 103. The pending command handling process is executed in the command handling process in step S1102 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 17).

  When the first hold command is transmitted from the main side MPU 82 to the sound light side MPU 93, the sound light side MPU 93 transmits a corresponding first hold command to the display side MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the first hold command (step S2801: YES), the display-side MPU 103 executes a hold display image increase process (step S2802). Thereby, if it is a normal game state, the hold image G1 displayed on the normal hold display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 is increased by one, and if it is a high probability state, the first hold display region 46 of the symbol display device 41 is increased. Is increased by one.

  If the first hold command received this time corresponds to the hold command for number notification (step S2803: YES), the number notification start processing is executed (step S2804). In the number notification start process, information on the number of notifications set in the suspension command for number notification is read, and the number display corresponding to the information on the number of notifications is executed by the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the frequency notification executed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the symbol display device 41 displays a character image as “Number change continuously 11 times! Change over 11 times is NG !!!!” as a frequency notification. The The player who has confirmed the notification of the number of times repeats the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b 11 times in the current high probability state, and then stops the launch of the game ball and plays the game in the first special figure display unit 37a. It becomes possible to recognize that it should wait for execution. Then, by performing the launch operation in this way, the maximum number of small hits that can be generated in the current high probability state is generated using the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b as an opportunity. It is possible to generate a jackpot result triggered by the game times in the 1 special figure display section 37a.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 45), after the number notification start process is executed in step S2804, “1” is set to the number notification flag provided in the display side RAM 105 (step S2805). The number notification flag is a flag for the display side MPU 103 to specify that the number notification is being executed. The state in which the number notification is being executed ends when a jackpot result is newly generated, and at that time, the number notification flag is cleared to “0”.

  If the first hold command received this time corresponds to a launch promotion notification command instead of the number notification hold command (step S2806: YES), a launch promotion notification start process is executed (step S2807). In the firing promotion notification start process, the firing promotion notification is executed by the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the firing promotion notification executed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46B, a character image “Turn as much as possible!” Is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a firing promotion notification. The player who has confirmed this launch promotion notification continues to launch the game ball so that the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed as much as possible in the current high probability state. By performing the launching operation in this way, the small hits triggered by the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b until the jackpot result triggered by the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is generated. It is possible to generate as many results as possible. The state in which the firing promotion notification is being executed ends when a jackpot result is newly generated.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 45), when a variation pattern command indicating that a game round should be newly started is received (step S2808: YES), a pending display image reduction process is executed (step S2809). ). As a result, the display of the hold image G1 in the normal hold display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 is reduced by one in the normal game state, and in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. The display of the reserved image G1 decreases by one. Thereafter, on the condition that “1” is set in the number notification flag of the display side RAM 105 (step S2810: YES), the number notification update processing is executed (step S2811). When the update process is executed, in the notification of the number of times displayed on the symbol display device 41, “Change the special figure 2 continuously N times! 1 is subtracted from the N value of the character image (an integer greater than or equal to 1).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Even when the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is ended when the number of game times executed reaches the end reference number in the high probability mode. As a result, in the high probability mode, the game is performed while paying attention to the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the pre-read notification corresponding to the content of the first hold information is executed at a timing before the first hold information becomes the execution target of the game times. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict the contents of the first hold information from before the game times triggered by the first hold information are started. In this case, the execution contents of the prefetch notification are different with the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode as at least one criterion. As a result, the contents of the prefetch notification can be associated with the number of remaining game times in the high probability mode, and the degree of attention to the prefetch notification can be increased.

  In the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are acquired separately, prefetch notification is started when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining games in the high probability mode The prefetch notification is executed in a state associated with the number of continuations. As a result, when the pre-read notification is executed, any of the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information within the range of the number of remaining game times in the high probability mode It is possible to make a player recognize whether or not to digest the game.

  In the high probability mode, the game times triggered by the second hold information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first hold information. Thereby, in the high probability mode, many game times triggered by the second hold information are executed. In this case, pre-read notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired are continued. The execution contents of the pre-read notification differ depending on the number of times. As a result, the situation in which the game times triggered by the second hold information should be preferentially digested should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second hold information are not executed and the jackpot result is handled. It becomes possible for the player to recognize whether or not the game times should be executed in response to one hold information.

  In a configuration in which a large number of game times triggered by the second hold information are executed in the high probability mode, even if the second hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the lottery mode is determined. The opening / closing execution mode is generated without changing the mode to the low probability mode. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to execute a large number of game times triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the high probability mode, it is advantageous for the player that the game times triggered by the first hold information are executed in the high probability mode. Become. In this configuration, pre-read notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired Due to the difference in the execution contents of the pre-read notification in relation to the number of times, the game times triggered by any pending information are executed within the range of the number of remaining game times in the high probability mode through the execution contents of the pre-read notifications. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not it should be done.

  Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information are executed in duplicate, it is possible to increase the number of game times executed per unit time. Also, in the high probability mode, the game times that are triggered by the second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result are shorter in the game times than the game times that are triggered by the first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result. Therefore, game times triggered by the second hold information in the high probability mode are easily digested. Even if the game times triggered by the second hold information are easily digested in the high probability mode, the game times triggered by the first hold information and the second hold information are triggered as described above. Therefore, the game times triggered by the first hold information are also executed in the high probability mode. In this case, pre-read notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired are continued. Due to the difference in the execution contents of the pre-read notification in relation to the number of times, the game times triggered by any holding information should be executed within the range of the number of remaining game times in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to make a player recognize whether there is any.

  Regardless of the number of times that the remaining number of game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the number of game times executed with the second hold information as an opportunity When it is the number of times that the game times triggered by the first hold information can be started in the current high probability mode, it is notified as a prefetch notification that a launch operation aimed at obtaining the second hold information should be performed. This allows the player to recognize that the game times triggered by the second hold information should be digested as much as possible before the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are started. It becomes possible.

  When the remaining number of game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of game times triggered by the second hold information If the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is a number of times that cannot be started in the current high probability mode, the number of times of game times triggered by the second hold information should be less than a predetermined number as pre-read notification Is notified. This allows the player to adjust the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information so that the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in the high probability mode. It can be recognized.

  Regardless of the number of times that the remaining number of game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the number of game times executed with the second hold information as an opportunity When the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that can be started in the current high probability mode, if the first hold information corresponds to a highly probable result, the player is prompted to launch a game ball. The notification for promoting the firing is not executed, and the notification for promoting the firing is executed when the first hold information corresponds to the low probability big hit result. If the first hold information corresponds to the low probability hit result, the launch promotion notification is executed, and if the high probability mode cannot be continued, It is possible to prompt the player to consume as many game times as possible using the second hold information so that a lot of profits are given to the player. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponds to the highly probable hit result, the game times triggered by the second hold information have been digested by preventing the launch promotion notification from being executed. Occurrence of a situation in which the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low probability hit result is executed before the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability big hit result. Can be prevented from being triggered by the execution of the firing promotion notification.

  When the remaining number of game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of game times triggered by the second hold information If the game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that the current high probability mode cannot be started, and if the first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode A pre-read notification for frequency notification indicating that the number of game times to be executed with the second hold information as an opportunity should be less than a predetermined number is executed, and the first hold information is in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In any case, in the case of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the prefetch notification for the number notification is not executed. When the first hold information is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode, the first hold information is played in the high probability mode by performing the prefetch notification for the number notification. It is possible to make the player recognize what should be the trigger for the execution of the game. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in either the low probability mode or the high probability mode, the first hold information is executed after the end of the high probability mode. Even if triggered, a jackpot result will occur. In this case, the first hold information does not need to be executed in the current high probability mode. Therefore, in such a situation, the need for execution is low by preventing the prefetch notification for frequency notification from being executed. It is possible to prevent the pre-reading notification for frequency notification from being executed in a situation.

  Even when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is executed with the second hold information as a trigger, the game times triggered by the first hold information can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the digestibility of game times.

  In the situation where the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the game times are not executed. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the opening / closing execution mode.

  One of the first hold information and the second hold information, and the other of the first hold information and the second hold information in a situation where a game is triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. When the game round is started with the hold information of the other, the other hold information is not handled as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Thus, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed with one of the first holding information and the second holding information as an opportunity, the opening / closing corresponding to the jackpot result with the other holding information as a trigger It is possible to prevent duplicate execution modes from occurring. On the other hand, in one of the situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result are executed, When the game times triggered by the first hold information are started, the first hold information can be treated as hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is executed with the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information from being handled as pending information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  The duration of game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the duration and small hits of game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode. It is set to a period equal to or longer than the total period with the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the result. As a result, in the situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is triggered Even if game times are started, the game times triggered by the first hold information are ended after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is ended. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the big hit result from being executed redundantly.

  The event that results in a loss result in the game times triggered by the second hold information occurs only in the situation where the game times are executed with the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result being executed. In this case, when the game times with the second hold information as the execution target result in the situation where the game times with the first hold information as the execution target are executed, the first hold currently being executed This means that a jackpot result will be generated in the game times for which information is to be executed. In other words, the occurrence notification of the jackpot result can be executed by utilizing the phenomenon that a result of losing in the game times with the second hold information as an execution target.

<Another embodiment of the fourth embodiment>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the fourth embodiment described above, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another form may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the fourth embodiment.

  In place of the configuration in which the content of the notification to be executed is determined among the pre-reading notification for frequency notification and the pre-reading notification for launch promotion according to the number of executions of the remaining game times in the high probability mode, the high probability mode The content of these notifications may be determined according to the number of games executed in.

  -When the prefetch notification for frequency notification is performed, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the period until the game time used as the execution object for the 1st pending | holding information corresponding to a jackpot result is started. As a result, the player can recognize the period until the game times in which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is started, and as many small hit results as possible are generated in that period. Thus, the launch of the game ball toward the second working port 34 is continued.

  -As a type of jackpot result, there is no low probability big hit result, and when it is a jackpot result, it is possible to make sure that the result is a high probability big hit result. In addition, instead of the configuration, when the second hold information becomes the target of the success / failure determination process and the jackpot result is obtained, the high-accuracy big hit result is surely obtained, or the second hold information becomes the target of the success / failure determination process and the jackpot result. In such a case, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a winning at the V prize opening is possible and a winning at the V winning opening is generated, resulting in a highly accurate winning result. In the case of these configurations, at least in the game times in which the second hold information is the execution target, the low probability winning result is not obtained. Therefore, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at a timing that is reliably executed within the range of the high probability mode, the pre-reading notification for promoting the firing is executed regardless of the type of the jackpot result. It is preferable to adopt a configuration.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the normal gaming state and the high probability state are set as the gaming state, the low-frequency support state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode; Is set, and when the number of game times executed in the high frequency support state reaches the end reference number, the frequency notification state as in the fourth embodiment is used. A configuration may be applied in which the pre-reading notification and the pre-reading notification for launch promotion are executed.

  -It is not limited to the structure by which the game time which made 1st hold information execution object and the game time which made 2nd hold information execution object overlapped, and one game time of these game times In the situation where the game is executed, the start of the other game time is prevented, and the game time having the second hold information as the execution target is prioritized over the game time having the first hold information as the execution target. The configuration in which the pre-reading notification for the frequency notification and the pre-reading notification for launch promotion are executed as in the fourth embodiment may be applied to the configuration.

  -It is good also as a structure by which the start of a game round is blocked | prevented in the condition where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Moreover, you may apply the structure which performs the prefetch alert | report for frequency | count notifications and the prefetch alert | report for launch promotion like the said 4th Embodiment with respect to the said structure.

  -It is good also as a structure by which the start of a game time is permitted even if it is the situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the digestion rate of game times. However, in this configuration, it is conceivable that the game times corresponding to the jackpot result will end in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the jackpot result as a trigger. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode may be newly started after the currently executed opening / closing execution mode ends, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the end of the game times corresponding to the jackpot result is It is good also as a structure performed in the form integrated into the opening / closing execution mode currently performed (for example, the frequency | count of execution of a round game increases).

  -When 2nd pending | holding information becomes the object of a success / failure determination process, it is good also as a structure which may become a losing result which is neither a jackpot result nor a jackpot result.

  The game times in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result among the first hold information and the second hold information is the execution target and the game times in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target are executed in duplicate. When the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed first ends in the situation where the game is executed, the opening / closing execution mode is started until the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the loss result is to be executed are ended. Is not limited to the configuration in which the game information in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target, and the game time in which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target is It may be configured to forcibly end and immediately start the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from becoming long.

  In addition, at the timing when the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target are ended, the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the outage result is the execution target are temporarily stopped, and then the opening / closing execution mode is ended. The game times that have been temporarily stopped after the game may be resumed, or the game times that have been temporarily stopped may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the game times once stopped are re-executed from the beginning, it may be configured to newly execute the determination processing for the hold information that triggered the start of the game times. It is good also as a structure which takes over a result.

  -In the situation where the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target are being executed, when the game times for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed are started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is handled as a result of disregarding regardless of the content, but the hold information on the different side is the execution target, although the hold information on the different side is the execution target of the success / failure determination process A configuration may be adopted in which, when the game round ends, it is treated as an outlier result regardless of the execution result of the success / failure determination process.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for improving the game performance and the interest of the game is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the first embodiment, at least part of a period in which game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least part of a period in which game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. However, in this embodiment, when the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, In addition to the configuration that is not started, a new game turn is not started in a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game turn in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is executed. In addition, it is made to respond | correspond to it being the structure by which game rotation is not started by the other when the game turn is performed by one side among the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b in this way. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are displayed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. In either case where the game times are executed in the first special figure display unit 37a or in the case where the game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the decoration area 43. Is executed.

  In this embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the small hit result is not set as the result of the success / failure determination process, and the case where the first hold information is the execution target of the success / failure determination process and the second hold information is the The same success / failure table (a low-probability determination table in the normal gaming state and a high-probability table in the high probability state) is referred to when the determination process is executed.

  In the first embodiment, the same distribution table is referred to when the first hold information is the execution target of the distribution determination process and when the second hold information is the execution target of the distribution determination process. However, in this embodiment, the distribution table referred to is different between the first hold information and the second hold information. FIG. 47A and FIG. 47B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the distribution table in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 47A and FIG. 47B, in this embodiment, 4R jackpot result, 8R jackpot result, and 16R jackpot result are set as types of jackpot results. Each of these jackpot results is a jackpot result that triggers the execution of the open / close execution mode, which is the round number regulation mode, and the gaming state after the end of the open / close execution mode is a high probability state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) It is a jackpot result. That is, in the present embodiment, there is no jackpot result in which the gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). However, the high-probability state ends when the number of game times executed without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode becomes the end reference number as in the fourth embodiment, and the game state is the normal game It will shift to the state. The end reference count is the same for any jackpot result.

  The number of round games executed in the opening / closing execution mode is different between the 4R jackpot result, the 8R jackpot result, and the 16R jackpot result. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result, the round game occurs four times, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 8R jackpot result, the round game occurs eight times, triggered by the 16R jackpot result. In the opening / closing execution mode, round games occur 16 times. Therefore, among the jackpot results, the 4R jackpot result is the most disadvantageous, the 8R jackpot result is the next most advantageous, and the 16R jackpot result is the most advantageous.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), in the distribution table for the first special figure that is referred to when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target of the sorting determination process, the jackpot result As a type, 4R jackpot result and 16R jackpot result are set. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 89” corresponds to the 4R jackpot result, and “90 to 99” corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, when the jackpot result is triggered by the first hold information, the probability of the 4R jackpot result is higher than the probability of the 16R jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), the distribution table for the second special figure that is referred to when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target of the sorting determination process includes the jackpot result. As the types, 8R jackpot result and 16R jackpot result are set. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 49” corresponds to the 8R jackpot result, and “50 to 99” corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, when the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information, the probability of the 16R jackpot result is the same as the probability of the 8R jackpot result.

  When comparing the first holding information and the second holding information, if the first holding information is a big hit result, the 4R big hit result can be selected and the 4R big hit result is more than the probability of the 16R big hit result. In contrast to the higher probability, if the result is a jackpot result triggered by the second pending information, the 8R jackpot result can be selected instead of selecting the 4R jackpot result, and the probability that the 16R jackpot result and the 8R jackpot result Is the same probability. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot result triggered by the second hold information is more advantageous for the player than the jackpot result triggered by the first hold information. Furthermore, the probability of a jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is executed for the first hold information and the probability of the jackpot result when the success / failure determination process is executed for the second hold information are the same. It is. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game times triggered by the second hold information than to execute the game times triggered by the first hold information.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing special electric power end processing in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. In the present embodiment, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are not executed redundantly, and therefore, as in the first embodiment. The 1 special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are not individually set, but the common special figure special electric control process is executed for both the first hold information and the second hold information. . The basic processing configuration of the common special figure special power control process is the same as the first special figure special electric control process (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special electric control process (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. In the special special figure special electric control process, the special figure special start process is executed when the value of the special figure special electric counter provided in the main RAM 84 is “0”, and the special figure special electric counter value is “1”. In the case where the special figure fluctuation process is executed, the special figure special electric counter value is “2”, the special figure finalizing process is executed, and the special figure special electric counter value is “3”. A special power start process is executed, and when the special figure special power counter value is “4”, a special power special release process is executed. When the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, the special electricity termination process is executed.

  As in the first embodiment, the ending period is set in the special power release opening process. If the ending period has elapsed (step S2901: YES), the game state setting process is executed. . In the game state setting process, “1” is set to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2902), and “80” is set to the game number counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2903).

  The high probability flag is a flag for the main side MPU 82 to specify whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode with the jackpot result as an end, when the game number of times of the end reference number (specifically 80 times) is executed without generating the jackpot result, The gaming state is configured to shift from the high probability state to the normal gaming state. The game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of end reference times. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S2904). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special figure determining process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main MPU 82.

  When the final stop period of the current game time has elapsed (step S3001: YES), if the value of the game number counter is 1 or more (step S3002: YES), the value of the game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S3003). ). When the value of the game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S3004: YES), the high probability flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S3005). Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time corresponding to the jackpot result. (Step S3006). If the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step S3006: YES), 1 is added to the value of the special figure special counter (step S3007). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter to be added by adding 1 corresponds to the special electricity start process. “3”. On the other hand, when the game time this time does not correspond to the jackpot result (step S3006: NO), the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S3008). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 82.

  In the special figure change start process, the second hold information is held in the second special figure hold area 126 on condition that either the first hold information or the second hold information is held and stored (step S3101: YES). It is determined whether it is stored (step S3102). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a maximum of four pieces of first hold information are held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 and a maximum of four pieces are stored in the second special figure holding area 126. The second hold information is stored on hold.

  If the second hold information is stored on hold (step S3102: YES), the data setting process of the second special figure is executed (step S3103). In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Thereby, the start object of this game round becomes the 2nd special figure display part 37b. Thereafter, processing for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 126a, and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, and the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease time command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure reservation area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41. Change according to the decrease in the number.

  If the second hold information is not stored (step S3102: NO), the data setting process of the first special figure is executed (step S3104). In the data setting process of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Thereby, the start object of this game round becomes the 1st special figure display part 37a. Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of the 1st special figure reservation area 125 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a, and the second area 125b → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, and the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the 1st special figure reservation display part 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed into the content which the 1st reservation information decreased by one. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  Here, when the second hold information is held and stored by executing the process of step S3102, even if the first hold information is acquired at a timing earlier than the second hold information, 2 Hold information becomes the start of game times. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b over the execution of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a. As described above, it is more advantageous for the player that the second hold information becomes the start of game times than the first hold information becomes the start of game times. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are preferentially digested over the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, so that priority is given to the second holding information which is an advantageous side for the player. As a result, it is possible to make a game round start target.

  When the process of step S3103 or step S3104 is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S3105). In the winner determination process, if the winner lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low-probability table is stored in the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / notch lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game target is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. . After reading the success / failure table, for the determination of success / failure from the hold information stored on the start side of the current game round in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S3106: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3107). In the allocation determination process, when the start target of the current game round is the first hold information, the distribution table for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83 and the start target of the current game round is the second hold. If it is information, the distribution table for the second special figure is read from the main ROM 83. After the allocation table is read out, the allocation information stored in the game game start start side in the first special figure execution area 127a and the second special figure execution area 127b is assigned from the allocation information. Information for determination, that is, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out, and it is specified which type of jackpot result in the distribution table corresponds to the read numerical information.

  After executing the distribution determination process, “1” is set to the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S3108). Specifically, when the 4R jackpot result is supported, “1” is set to the 4R jackpot flag, and when the 8R jackpot result is supported, “1” is set to the 8R jackpot flag, and 16R When it corresponds to the jackpot result, “1” is set to the 16R jackpot flag. In the following description, the determination process for determining whether or not the various jackpot results are made is performed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. In addition, the state where “1” is set in step S3108 is cleared to “0” when the special power ending process ends when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  After executing the flag set process for the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3109). Specifically, the information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are the starting targets of the current game round, is a stop for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. The result information is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the picture to be stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the jackpot result. In step S3109, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S3108 is stored in the main RAM 84. In addition, the pattern stop mode may be set corresponding to each jackpot result on a one-to-one basis, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some jackpot results. Although the method for selecting the stop result for the jackpot result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, for example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2.

  When the result of the determination result is not a jackpot result (step S3106: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3110). Specifically, in the current game round, information on the pattern form that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. And the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. It becomes one kind of.

  When the process of step S3109 or step S3110 is executed, the specifying process of the variable display period is executed (step S3112). In the variable display period specifying process, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, it is determined that the reach effect is generated when the game times that are the start targets this time correspond to the jackpot result. In addition, even if the game time that is the start target this time does not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the start target side is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect occurs, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The reach non-occurrence variation display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Thereafter, the current numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display period is determined by collating with the already read fluctuation display period table. Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

  Thereafter, the current value set in the game counter of the main RAM 84 is read (step S3112). Then, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game time that is the start target this time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3113). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S3111 and the game time that is the start target is in any of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether it is compatible is included. Further, the change command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. In addition, if the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, information directly indicating whether or not the reach effect is to be executed is a change command. It may be set to. The change command includes information indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state, and the value of the game number counter grasped in step S3112, that is, the current gaming state is a high probability state. If there is, information indicating the remaining number of times of the high probability state is included. The type command includes information on whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, it is any kind of jackpot result This information is included.

  After that, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the display unit of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b which is the start target of the current game round (step S3114). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S3115). When the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “0”, so that the value of the special figure special electricity counter to be added by adding 1 is added to the special figure fluctuation in-process. Corresponding “1”.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the table setting process in the present embodiment which is executed by the sound light side MPU 93. The table setting process is executed in step S901 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

  When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 82 (step S3201: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the determination of the success / failure determination and the distribution determination determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of the current game round is specified, and the specified information is used as the sound side. Write to RAM95. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S3203). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16R jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which a combination with the same odd number of symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result, If the game result of the game times is a 4R jackpot result or an 8R jackpot result, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination with the same even number of symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the change command. When a reach effect occurs, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established that is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the reach symbol are not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  Thereafter, the effect lottery table reading process is executed (step S3204). In the read process, an effect lottery table corresponding to the current situation is read from the sound light side ROM 94. Then, the effect lottery process is executed (step S3205). In the effect lottery process, numerical value information of an effect lottery counter provided so as to be periodically updated in the sound side RAM 95 is read out, and the numerical information is collated with the effect lottery table read out in step S3204. Thus, the type of effect generated in the current game round is specified.

  After that, the control table reading process corresponding to the execution content of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S3206). In this process, the information on the variable display period is specified from the contents of the command for fluctuation received this time, the information on the variable display period, the information on the game result specified in step S3202, and the stop result in step S3203. And a control table corresponding to the combination of the information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S3205 are read from the sound side ROM 94 and written in the sound side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 corresponding to the current game play effect and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the current game play effect are set. Accordingly, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S3207). The variation pattern command includes information on the variation display period of the game times that are to be started, information that indicates whether the game times that are to be started correspond to the jackpot result or the outage result, and the start Information indicating which of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b corresponds to the target game times, information on the stop result determined in step S3203, and Information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S3205. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display side MPU 103 starts display control for executing an effect for game times in the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed as in step S1009 in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the process of reading the effect lottery table in step S3204.

  When the current game state is not a high probability state (step S3301: NO), or when the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S3302: NO), the other effect lottery table is read out. (Step S3303). In the other effect lottery tables, a plurality of types of effects are set as effects for game times, and the effect lottery is performed for each of the effects so that the selection probability of these types of effects is a predetermined probability. Counter value is allocated. Specifically, in the other effect lottery tables, an effect lottery table for the occurrence of reach and an effect lottery table for when no reach occurs are set. If the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach production, the production lottery table for the occurrence of reach in the other production lottery tables is read from the sound side ROM 94, and this game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach production. If not, the effect lottery table for the non-reach occurrence in the other effect lottery tables is read from the sound light side ROM 94. A plurality of types of reach effects are set in the effect lottery table for the occurrence of reach, and a plurality of types of notice effects that are executed before the reach effects are generated. A plurality of types of notice effects are set in the effect lottery table when no reach occurs. By reading the effect lottery table for the occurrence of reach, in the effect lottery process (step S3205), the type of reach effect and the type of notice effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round are determined by lottery. Is done. By reading the effect lottery table when no reach occurs, the type of the notice effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round is determined by lottery in the effect lottery process (step S3205).

  In the effect lottery table reading process, if the current game state is a high probability state (step S3301: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S3302: YES), the variation received this time The numerical information of the game number counter set in the command for the game, that is, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the current high probability state, and whether the number of continuations of the remaining game times is less than or equal to the branch reference number It is determined whether or not (step S3304). The branch reference number is set to 30 times. Here, in the high probability state, the probability that the jackpot result is selected in the success / failure determination process is 1/30. The branch reference frequency is the number of denominators of this jackpot probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch reference frequency may be more than 30 times or less.

  When the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number (step S3304: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound side ROM 94 (step S3305). If the remaining number of times of remaining in the high probability state is greater than the branch reference number (step S3304: NO), the game result of the current game round is a 16R jackpot result based on the information set in the type command received this time. It is determined whether it corresponds to (step S3306). If it corresponds to the 16R jackpot result (step S3306: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound side ROM 94 (step S3307), and if it does not correspond to the 16R jackpot result (step S3306: NO), the first The 2 effect lottery table is read from the sound side ROM 94 (step S3308).

  The first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table, a plurality of types of effects are set as effects for game times, and the selection probabilities of these types of effects have a predetermined probability. The value of the counter for effect lottery is assigned to each. Specifically, since the first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table are effect lottery tables that are selected only in the game times that result in the jackpot, there are a plurality of types of these first effect lottery tables and second effect lottery tables. And a plurality of types of notice effects that are executed before the reach effect occurs. In this case, as shown in FIG. 52A, the probability that a special effect is selected as a reach effect is set to 30% in the first effect lottery table, whereas in the second effect lottery table, The special effects are not included in the reach effects that can be selected. The special effects are not included in the types of reach effects that can be selected in the other effect lottery tables read out in step S3303. Therefore, in the situation where the first effect lottery table is read, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, and the game times or the high probability state in which one of the jackpot results is obtained. In the situation where the remaining number of game times is greater than the branch reference number, the special effect occurs only in the game times that result in the 16R jackpot result, and in other situations, the special effect does not occur.

  The timing at which the special effect is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d). FIG. 53 (a) shows the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state, FIG. 53 (b) shows the execution timing of the special effect, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 16R jackpot result. FIG. 53 (d) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b), a special effect occurs as shown in FIG. 53 (b) at the timing t1 before the remaining number of game times in the high probability state reaches the branch reference number. As shown in FIG. 53 (c), a 16R jackpot result is generated. In other words, when the remaining number of remaining game times in the high probability state is greater than the branch reference number, a special effect may occur on condition that a 16R jackpot result is generated. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in a high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect will I will be greatly satisfied.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the number of remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result occurs as shown in the timing of t2, and the timing of t3. Thus, a special effect can occur in any case where a 16R jackpot result occurs. Even if any jackpot result occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a high probability state with an end reference number of 80 occurs after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Then, when the number of remaining game times in the high-probability state is reduced, the player wants a jackpot result because any player can be used. In this case, if the number of remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, a special effect can be generated regardless of the type of jackpot result. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in a high probability state, it is determined that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with that. It will be.

  In addition, as a special effect, the timing during which the symbol display for game times is being displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the symbol is being displayed on the special diagram display units 37a and 37b. At a specific timing, the display light-emitting unit 64 emits light in a special manner, a special sound is output from the speaker unit 65, and an effect in which a special character is displayed on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The content of timing and special effects is arbitrary. For example, the special effect may be started at the timing when the game times are started, or the special effect may be started before the reach effect is started at the game times. The reach effect is started at the game times. It is good also as a structure where a special production is started after being done. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides the ventilation mechanism which sends out air toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 from the front of the launch operation apparatus 28, and performs ventilation by the ventilation mechanism as a special effect.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the remaining number of game times in the high probability state is greater than the branch reference number, a special effect can be generated on condition that a 16R jackpot result is generated. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in a high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect will I will be greatly satisfied.

  On the other hand, if the number of remaining game times in the high-probability state decreases, the player will want a jackpot result because it can be any type. In this case, if the number of remaining game times in the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, a special effect can be generated regardless of the type of jackpot result. As a result, when a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in a high probability state, it is determined that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with that. It will be.

<Another form of the fifth embodiment>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the description of the fifth embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different form may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the fifth embodiment.

  A configuration in which a special effect is reliably generated when a 16R jackpot result is generated in a situation where the number of remaining game times in the high probability state is greater than the reference number of branches. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the special effect is executed in a situation where the remaining number of game times in the high probability state is greater than the branch reference number.

  -It is not limited to a configuration in which a special effect occurs only at the game times where the jackpot result occurs, and in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the game times are executed before the hold information. It is good also as a structure by which special production is started in the situation where the game times triggered by the hold information which became will be performed. In this case, it is possible to ensure a long period during which the special effect is executed. In this configuration, the jackpot result that can be the target of execution of special effects depending on whether or not the number of remaining game times in the high probability state at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is larger than the branch reference number The type can be changed, and the jackpot result that can be the target of special effects depending on whether or not the number of continuations of game times at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is actually executed is greater than the branch reference number It is good also as a structure by which the kind of is changed.

  -In the situation where the number of remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the branch reference number, the hold information corresponding to either the 8R jackpot result or the 16R jackpot result becomes the target of execution of special effects, and the remaining in the high probability state In a situation where the number of game times to be continued is equal to or less than the branch reference number, the hold information corresponding to the 16R jackpot result may be a target for execution of the special effect.

  -If there are more than three types of jackpot results that can be selected when the second hold information becomes the execution target of the success / failure determination process, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is the branching criterion. In the situation where the number of times is greater than the number of times, special effects can be executed in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result except the jackpot result of the least advantageous type, while the remaining number of game times in the high probability state is the branch reference number In the following situations, a special effect may be executed even in the game times corresponding to any jackpot result.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the normal gaming state and the high probability state are set as the gaming state, the low-frequency support state in which the support mode is the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support state in which the support mode is the high-frequency support mode; Is set, and the special effect as in the fifth embodiment is provided for the configuration that becomes the low-frequency support state when the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support state reaches the end reference number. The configuration to be executed may be applied.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration and game playability of the game area PA are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA11 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and a lower area than the variable display unit 36 that is continuous below the upper area PA11. A left area PA12 that is a left area, a right area PA13 that is continuous to the lower area of the upper area PA11 and to the right of the variable display unit 36, a left area PA12, and a right area PA13. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA14 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 36.

  When the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with a rotation amount in a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first shooting operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA11. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the left area PA12 → the lower area PA14. On the other hand, when the player operates the shooting operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second shooting operation, in the upper area PA11, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA12 of the left area PA12 and the right area PA13 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA13. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14.

  The lower area PA14 is provided with a first operation port 33 as in the first embodiment. However, the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in this embodiment, a special pitching device 151 and a through gate 152 are provided. The configuration of the special pitching device 151 is the same as that of the first special pitching device 131 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the special pitching device 151 can be switched between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The special pitching device 151 and the through gate 152 are provided in the right area PA13 of the game area PA. In addition, a special prize winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, the game ball flowing down the left area PA12 can win the first operation port 33, and cannot win the special ball winning device 151, the through gate 152, and the special electric winning device 32. The game balls flowing down the right area PA13 can win the special winning device 151, the through gate 152, and the special electric prize winning device 32, and cannot win the first operating port 33. The number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special pitching device 151 is one, but the number of payouts may be two or more.

  In the right area PA <b> 13, a special pitching device 151 is provided below the through gate 152. The through gate 152 and the special pitching device 151 are arranged so that the center in the horizontal direction at each entrance portion of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 152 in the vertical direction surely wins the special pitching device 151 if the special pitching device 151 is open, and the special pitching device 151 is closed. It flows down toward the special electric prize winning device 32.

  The special pitching device 151 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning to the first through gate 152. Specifically, when the winning to the through gate 152 occurs, the hold information on the normal side is acquired with the upper limit storage number (specifically, 4) as the upper limit. When the hold information on the base map side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the base map display section of the base map unit 38 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area through which the game ball does not pass in the game area PA At 38a, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. When the result of the internal lottery is a win and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is terminated, the special pitching device 151 is opened in a predetermined manner. In addition, a general map hold display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general map display unit 38a, and the number of hold information on the general map side is displayed by lighting the general map hold display unit 38b. Yes.

  When a winning to the first operating port 33 occurs, the first holding information is stored in the first special figure holding area 125 with an upper limit of four, and when the winning to the special pitching device 151 occurs. The second hold information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 with the upper limit being four. In this case, the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is notified by the first special figure holding display unit 37c and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. The number of second hold information is notified by the second special figure hold display section 37d.

  The first special figure holding display part 37 c is provided in the upper frame part 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The first special figure hold display unit 37c has the same number of light emitting units 154 as the upper limit number of the first hold information that can be stored in the first special figure hold area 125 so as to be arranged side by side. When one first hold information is held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125, the leftmost light emitting unit 154 is turned on and the other light emitting units 154 are turned off. When two pieces of first hold information are held and stored in the special figure holding area 125, the two light emitting units 154 from the left are turned on and the other light emitting units 154 are turned off. When three pieces of first hold information are held and stored in the holding area 125, the three light emitting units 154 from the left are turned on and the other light emitting units 154 are turned off, and the first special figure holding area is displayed. When four pieces of first hold information are stored on 125, all the light emitting units 154 are in a light emitting state.

  The second special figure holding display part 37d is provided in the upper frame part 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The second special figure hold display section 37d has the same number of light emitting sections 155 as the upper limit number of second hold information that can be stored in the second special figure hold area 126 so as to be arranged side by side. When one second hold information is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126, the leftmost light emitting unit 155 is turned on and the other light emitting units 155 are turned off. When two pieces of second hold information are held and stored in the special figure holding area 126, the two light emitting units 155 from the left are turned on and the other light emitting units 155 are turned off. When three pieces of second hold information are held and stored in the hold area 126, the three light emitting units 155 from the left are turned on and the other light emitting units 155 are turned off, and the second special figure holding area is displayed. When four pieces of second on-hold information are stored on 126, all the light emitting units 155 are in a light emitting state.

  As a gaming state other than the opening / closing execution mode, a normal gaming state and a high probability state are set as in the first embodiment. In the normal gaming state, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In the high probability state, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. In addition, the special pitching device 151 is not easily opened in the low frequency support mode, and the special pitching device 151 is easily opened in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the contents of the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d).

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d), in the success / failure table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. As in the first embodiment, the jackpot result is a success / failure result that can be a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special prize-winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and a transition trigger for the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition for both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, while triggering the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As described above, the switch to the opening / closing execution mode is performed regardless of whether the result is a jackpot result or the small hit result, but the opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is The opening / closing mode of the special prize winning device 32 is different from the opening / closing execution mode executed when the winning result is obtained. Specifically, the opening / closing execution mode executed when the jackpot result is a round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit, as in the first embodiment. As described above, the round game is until a predetermined opening continuation period elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the special electric prize device 32 until one of the conditions is satisfied. It is a game that continues. In this case, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. , The opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit number is set to 10. Therefore, since the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch period of the game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, the upper limit is set to the special prize apparatus 32 in each round game. It can be expected that more than one game ball will win. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 1 round regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are The open / closed number regulation mode is terminated when one of the conditions for winning the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. The opening duration of the special prize winning device 32 in the open / close number regulation mode is longer than the game ball firing cycle (specifically 0.6 seconds), and the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit number (specifically 10). The opening / closing number regulation period is shorter than the product of. In this pachinko machine 10, since the number of opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to one, the one opening continuation period is set as the above-mentioned opening / closing number regulation period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of opening / closing of the special electric prize device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the plurality of opening continuation periods is the above-mentioned opening / closing number regulation. It is good also as a structure set to the use period. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulating period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the number of players can be increased although the number is smaller than the opening / closing execution mode executed when the big hit result is obtained.

  As the success / failure table, as shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d), the first special figure used for the judgment of the validity of the first holding information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. And a second special figure success / failure table used for determining whether or not the second holding information stored in the second special figure execution area 127b is successful. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different success / failure tables for the first hold information and the second hold information, and in either case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / failure lottery mode in the determination of success / failure. Existing.

  Specifically, each of the success / failure tables will be described below. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the low probability table for the first special figure has two random number values (for example, “5” and “305” as the jackpot result). )), And other values are random numbers resulting in outliers. In other words, when the success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the success / failure determination is made for the first hold information, the outcome may not be the jackpot result, although it may be either the jackpot result or the missed result.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the high probability table for the first special figure is set to have a larger number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result than in the low probability table for the first special figure. Specifically, there are 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305” ”,“ 334 ”,“ 365 ”,“ 392 ”,“ 420 ”,“ 470 ”,“ 495 ”,“ 520 ”,“ 558 ”,“ 575 ”,“ 599 ”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. The other random number values are random number values that result in outliers. In other words, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the first hold information, the jackpot result or the lost result is not a small hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), in the low probability table for the second special figure, the random number value resulting in the jackpot result is the same as in the low probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the number of random number values resulting in the small hit result is 40 (for example, “3”, “8”, “31”, “37”, “55”, “68”, “127”, “133”). , “160”, “166”, “189”, “195”, “217”, “223”, “242”, “248”, “273”, “279”, “302”, “308”, “ 331 ”,“ 337 ”,“ 355 ”,“ 368 ”,“ 389 ”,“ 395 ”,“ 417 ”,“ 423 ”,“ 467 ”,“ 473 ”,“ 492 ”,“ 498 ”,“ 517 ” , “523”, “555”, “561”, “572”, “578”, “596” “598”). The other random number values are random number values that result in outliers. That is, when the winning / not-winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second hold information, either the big hit result, the small hit result or the lost result is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot result is the same as that of the high probability table for the second special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small hit result is the same as that in the low probability table for the second special figure. The other random number values are random number values that result in outliers. That is, when the winning / not-winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second hold information, either the big hit result, the small hit result, or the lost result is obtained.

  As described above, when the second hold information is an opportunity for the success / failure determination, it is possible to generate a small hit result, so that a special winning device 151 can be won to deal with the small hit result. The open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is generated, the player can slightly increase the ball.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot result occurs in the normal gaming state, the game state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode based on the round number regulation mode, and the gaming state becomes a high probability state after the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high probability state will continue reliably until the jackpot result subsequently occurs nine times. If the jackpot result that occurred in the normal gaming state is the first time, and if the jackpot result has occurred ten times, the high probability state is entered even after the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the tenth jackpot result. However, this high-probability state ends when four game times, which is the same number as the upper limit number of hold memories of the second hold information, are executed. If a jackpot result is obtained in a high probability state that continues up to the upper limit of four times, the game is performed after the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result, as in the case of a jackpot result in the normal gaming state. The state becomes a high probability state, and this high probability state will continue reliably until the jackpot result subsequently occurs nine times. In the high probability state, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode as in the first embodiment, and in the normal gaming state, the success / failure lottery mode as in the first embodiment. Becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a low probability mode.

  In the first embodiment, at least part of a period in which game times are executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least part of a period in which game times are executed on the second special figure display unit 37b. However, in this embodiment, when the game times are executed in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, The configuration is not started. In addition, in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being triggered by the game times in any of the special figure display units 37a, 37b, a new game time is not started. In addition, it is made to respond | correspond to it being the structure by which game rotation is not started by the other when the game turn is performed by one side among the 1st special figure display part 37a and the 2nd special figure display part 37b in this way. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are displayed as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. In either case where the game times are executed in the first special figure display unit 37a or in the case where the game times are executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbols is performed in the decoration area 43. Is executed.

  Next, a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process in the present embodiment executed by the main side MPU 82. In the present embodiment, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are not executed redundantly, and therefore, as in the first embodiment. The 1 special figure special electric control process and the second special figure special electric control process are not individually set, but the common special figure special electric control process is executed for both the first hold information and the second hold information. .

  In the special figure special power control process, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed (step S3401). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the hold information acquisition process. When the first operating port 33 has been won (step S3501: YES), and the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S3502). : YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed.

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main side RAM 84 provides the main side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125. The value of the first special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S3503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure hold display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37 c corresponds to the number of first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125.

  Thereafter, the values of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S3503 ( Step S3504). In this embodiment, the type of jackpot result is determined according to the contents of the gaming state when the jackpot result is reached, and the jackpot result counter C2 is provided because the type of jackpot result is not determined by lottery. It is not done. Thereafter, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3505). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of first hold information in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 and increasing the number of hold. Change it according to.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, a negative determination is made in step S3502, or if the process of step S3505 is executed, a winning to the special pitching device 151 has occurred (step S3506: YES), and further If the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S3507: YES), a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed.

  In the process for acquiring the second hold information, first, the main side RAM 84 provides the main side MPU 82 to grasp the number of unprocessed second hold information stored in the second special figure hold area 126. The value of the second special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S3508). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure hold counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure reservation display section 37d corresponds to the number of second hold information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126.

  Thereafter, the values of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number obtained by adding 1 in step S3508 ( Step S3509). Thereafter, a hold notification control process is executed (step S3510). Although details will be described later in the control processing of the hold notification, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time among the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is the second hold. A process for setting the light emission mode corresponding to the content of the information is executed.

  Thereafter, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3511). The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 and increasing the number of hold. Change it according to.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 56), after executing the holding information acquisition process (step S3401), the special figure special electric address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read (step S3402). In the special figure special power address table, the start address of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set.

  After reading the special figure special power address table, the start address corresponding to the special figure special electric power counter information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table (step S3403), and the process jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address (step S3404). ). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “0”, special figure fluctuation start processing is executed (step S3405), and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”, the special figure is started. The process during fluctuation is executed (step S3406), and if the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process is executed (step S3407), and the value of the special figure special electric counter is “3”. If there is, a special power start process is executed (step S3408). If the value of the special figure special counter is "4", a special electric release open process is executed (step S3409). If it is "5", a special electric power end process is executed (step S3410). Among these processes, the processing contents of the special figure changing process in step S3406 and the special electricity releasing process in step S3409 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation start process of step S3405.

  In the special figure change start process, the second hold information is held in the second special figure hold area 126 on the condition that either the first hold information or the second hold information is held and stored (step S3601: YES). It is determined whether it is stored (step S3602). If the second hold information is stored on hold (step S3602: YES), the data setting process of the second special figure is executed (step S3603).

  In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Thereby, the start object of this game round becomes the 2nd special figure display part 37b. Thereafter, processing for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 126a, and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, and the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the second special figure hold display part 37d is changed to the content in which the second hold information is reduced by one. That is, the state of each light emitting unit 155 in the second special figure holding display unit 37d is shifted to the left by one. Therefore, when the number of the second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is reduced from four to three, the number of the light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is four to three. When the number of the second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is reduced from three to two, the number of the light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is increased from three. When the number of second holding information stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is reduced from two to one, the number of light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state is two. The number is reduced from one to one, and the second reserved information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 from the state where one second reserved information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. If one of the light emitting units 155 is in a light emitting state, A state in which all of the light emitting portion 155 is in the off state. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease time command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure reservation area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41. Change according to the decrease in the number.

  If the second hold information is not stored (step S3602: NO), the data setting process of the first special figure is executed (step S3604). In the data setting process of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Thereby, the start object of this game round becomes the 1st special figure display part 37a. Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the storage area of the 1st special figure reservation area 125 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 125a, and the second area 125b → The data in each area is shifted, such as the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, and the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first special figure holding counter in the main RAM 84. Thereby, the display content of the 1st special figure hold display part 37c is changed into the content which 1st hold information decreased by one. That is, the state of each light emitting unit 154 in the first special figure hold display unit 37c is shifted to the left by one. Therefore, when the number of the first hold information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is decreased from four to three, the number of the light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is four to three. When the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is reduced from three to two, the number of the light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is changed from three. When the number of the first holding information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is reduced from two to one, the number of the light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is two. The number is reduced from one to one, and the first special information holding area 125 is not stored in the first special figure holding area 125 from the state where one first holding information is stored in the first special figure holding area 125. If one of the light emitting units 154 is in a light emitting state, A state in which all of the light emitting portion 154 is in the off state. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93. The sound light side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease command to the display side MPU 103, so that the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 is displayed. Change the number display to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  Here, by executing the process of step S3602, if the second hold information is stored on hold, even if the first hold information is acquired at an earlier timing than the second hold information, 2 Hold information becomes the start object of game times. This makes it possible to prioritize the execution of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b over the execution of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a. As described above, when the second hold information becomes a game start target, a small hit result may occur, whereas when the first hold information becomes a game start target, a small hit result Does not occur. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player that the second hold information becomes the start of game times than the first hold information becomes the start of game times. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are preferentially digested over the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, so that priority is given to the second holding information which is an advantageous side for the player. As a result, it is possible to make a game round start target.

  When the process of step S3603 or step S3604 is executed, the determination process is executed (step S3605). In the winner determination process, if the winner / rejection lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, a low-probability determination table for the first special figure (see FIG. 55A) When the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the game turn start target is the first special figure display unit 37a, the first special figure high-probability table (see FIG. 55 (b)). Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the game turn start target is the second special figure display unit 37b, the low special possibility table for the second special figure (see FIG. 55 (c)). ) Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start target of the game round is the second special figure display section 37b, a high probability decision table for the second special figure (FIG. 55 (d)) Read) from the main ROM 83. After reading the success / failure table, for the determination of success / failure from the hold information stored on the start side of the current game round in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure Information, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, is read, and it is determined whether or not the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table. In addition, when the start of the current game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, if it does not coincide with the numerical information set as the jackpot result, it is set as the jackpot result in the success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information.

  When the result of the determination process is a jackpot result (step S3606: YES), “1” is set to the jackpot flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3607). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3608). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b that are the targets of the current game round is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read from the main side. Store in the RAM 84.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S3609: YES), “1” is set to the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3610). As already described, the small hit result does not occur on the first special figure display unit 37a side, but only on the second special figure display unit 37b side. Thereafter, stop result setting processing for the small hit result is executed (step S3611). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37 b in the current game round is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result (step S3609: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3612). Specifically, in the current game round, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read out. Store in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the pattern mode information selected in the case of the jackpot result. It is a common type in the special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b.

  When the process of step S3608, step S3611, or step S3612 is executed, the variable display period specifying process is executed (step S3613). In the variable display period specifying process, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, it is first determined whether or not the game time that is the start target this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, it is determined that the reach effect is generated when the game times that are the start targets this time correspond to the jackpot result. In addition, even if the game time that is the start target this time does not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure When the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the start target side is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that the reach effect is generated. When it is determined that the reach effect occurs, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that the reach effect does not occur, it is stored in the main ROM 83. The reach non-occurrence variation display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Thereafter, the current numerical value information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display period is determined by collating with the already read fluctuation display period table. Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

  After that, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game time that is the current start time are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3614). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S3613, and the game time that is the start target is in any of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether it is compatible is included. Further, the change command includes information on whether or not to execute the reach effect. In addition, if the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, information directly indicating whether or not the reach effect is to be executed is a change command. It may be set to. Further, the change command includes information indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game time that is the current start target corresponds to the jackpot result.

  After that, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the display portion of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b that is the start target of the current game round (step S3615). Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S3616). When the special figure fluctuation start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “0”, so that the value of the special figure special electricity counter to be added by adding 1 is added to the special figure fluctuation in-process. Corresponding “1”.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special figure determination process in step S3407 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 56).

  In the special figure determination process, lottery is performed on the condition that the final stop period set in the special figure changing process of step S3406 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 56) has passed (step S3701: YES). A mode monitoring process is executed (step S3702). In the lottery mode monitoring process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter provided that the value of the game number counter provided in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, and the value of the game number counter after the subtraction is 1. When it is “0”, the value of the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As already explained, in this embodiment, when 10 jackpot results are set as one set, the high probability state is continued until the one set is completed, and the opening / closing execution mode by the last jackpot result of one set is ended. Is a high probability state that continues up to four game times. In this case, the game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state. Then, the value of the game number counter is decremented by 1 every time the game number is finished, and when the value of the game number counter after the decrement is “0”, the value of the high probability flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

  After executing the lottery mode monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the jackpot result by determining whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot flag of the main RAM 84. (Step S3703). If it corresponds to the jackpot result (step S3703: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the ongoing flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3704). The ongoing flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 82 whether or not the set state in which the 10 jackpot results are one set is being continued. When “1” is not set in the continuing flag (step S3704: NO), it means that the current jackpot result has occurred in the normal gaming state or the high probability state in which the upper limit is four gaming times. In this case, “1” is set to the continuing flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3705), and “10” is set to the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3706). The continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining jackpot results that occur in the set state.

  After that, information (specifically 20 seconds) of the first opening period corresponding to the jackpot result that triggers the start of the set state is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (step S3707). Then, the first opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3708). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode and the start of the set state is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

  When “1” is set in the ongoing flag (step S3704: YES), it means that the current jackpot result has occurred in the set state. In this case, information (specifically 10 seconds) of the second opening period corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (step S3709). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3710). Thereby, the presentation corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result in the set state or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. At 65.

  When “1” is not set in the big hit flag of the main side RAM 84 (step S3703: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the small hit flag of the main side RAM 84. It is determined whether or not the time corresponds to the small hit result (step S3711). If it corresponds to the small hit result (step S3711: YES), information on the second opening period (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is used. The counter is set (step S3712). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S3713). Thereby, the presentation corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result in the set state or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. At 65.

  When the process of step S3708, step S3710, or step S3713 is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S3714). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure determination process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by “3” corresponding to the special electric power start process (step S3408). " On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3711, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S3715). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S3405).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process in step S3408 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 56).

  When the opening period set in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 59) has elapsed (step S3801: YES), “1” is set to the value of the open / close count counter SOC provided in the main RAM 84 ( Step S3802). The open / close count counter SOC is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of times that the special prize winning device 32 is opened in the current open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the number of times that the special prize winning device 32 is opened is set to one in either the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result.

  After that, an upper limit winning number setting process is executed (step S3803). In the setting process, information corresponding to the maximum number of winnings is stored in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 in any of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (specifically, Specifically, “10”) is set. Then, an opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S3804). In the setting process, if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result, information on the opening duration for jackpot is set (specifically 29 seconds), and if the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result, Information on the opening duration for small hits (specifically, 1.8 seconds) is set. The opening duration for jackpots is set to be longer than the product of the launching period of the game balls (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the maximum number of winning prizes. The period is set to be shorter than the product of the firing period (specifically 0.6 seconds) and the upper limit winning number.

  Thereafter, a special electric release setting process is executed (step S3805). In the opening setting process, data setting is performed so that the special prize winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereby, the special electricity prize-winning apparatus 32 will be in an open state. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter. When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”. Therefore, by adding 1, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “4” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S3409). It becomes.

  In the special electric release opening process (step S3409), when the open continuation period set this time has elapsed, or when the number of winnings to the special electric prize winning device 32 exceeds the upper prize winning number, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Execute the process. When the special electricity prize winning device 32 is closed, the ending period is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter and an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special electric power end process of step S3410 in the special special electric voltage control process (FIG. 56).

  When the ending period set in the special electric release opening process (step S3409) has passed (step S3901: YES), on condition that the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result (step S3902: YES). Then, “1” is set to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3903). Thereafter, the value of the continuation counter in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S3904). If the value of the continuation counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S3905: YES), the continuation flag in the main RAM 84 is set. “0” is cleared (step S3906), and “4” is set in the game number counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3907). Thereby, after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode, a high probability state is established in which the upper limit is four game times. Thereafter, a special hold notification end process is executed (step S3908). In the termination process, a special hold notification flag (to be described later) in the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, a special notification target area (to be described later) in the second special figure reservation area 126 is cleared to “0”, and the second special map hold display is further displayed. The light emitting unit 155 that is in a special light emitting state to be described later in the unit 37d is set to a normal light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3902, a negative determination is made in step S3905, or if the process of step S3908 is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S3909). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S3405).

  Next, the hold notification control process executed in step S3510 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 57) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the hold notification control process is executed when the second hold information is newly acquired, and is not executed even if the first hold information is newly acquired.

  In the hold notification control process, it is determined whether or not the second hold information acquired this time is hold information that is a jackpot result in a high probability state (step S4001). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 in the second hold information acquired this time is read, and the high-probability determination for the second special figure which is a determination table for referring to the numerical information in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table.

  If the acquired second hold information is hold information that is a jackpot result in a high probability state (step S4001: YES), the first acquired from the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 this time 2. “1” is set to the jackpot hold flag provided in the area where the hold information is stored (step S4002). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 has a jackpot reservation flag separately from the winning random number area and the reach random number area. However, unlike the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are not provided with the jackpot type area, the duration area, and the set flag. Further, each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 is a special notification as an area for the main MPU 82 to specify that it is an execution target of a special reservation notification described later. A target area is provided. When the second hold information becomes a game turn start target and the second hold information stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure hold area 126 is shifted, the winning random number area The setting state of the reach random number area and the jackpot hold flag is not only shifted from the nth area to the n−1th area, but the setting state of the special notification target area is also shifted from the nth area to the n−1th area. .

  When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the special hold notification flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4003). The special hold notification flag is a flag for the main MPU 82 to specify that the light emission state of any one light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is the special light emission state.

  In this embodiment, when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the jackpot result is acquired in the set state in which one set of the 10 jackpot results is set, the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d The light emission state of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information can be a special light emission state. Specifically, the second hold information acquired in a situation where the second hold information is not stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is When established, the leftmost light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the first second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. Further, the second hold information acquired in a situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is If established, the second light emitting portion 155 from the left corresponding to the second second hold information among the light emitting portions 155 of the second special figure hold display portion 37d is in a blinking state as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in a situation where two pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is If established, the third light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the third second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the blinking state as the special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in a situation where three pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special figure hold area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is If established, the fourth light-emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the fourth second-holding information in the light-emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the blinking state as the special light-emitting state. Further, when a game play of the second special figure display unit 37b is newly started in a situation where any one of the light emission units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in the special light emission state, the special light emission state If the light emitting unit 155 is the leftmost light emitting unit 155, the special light emitting state is canceled, and the light emitting units 155 in the special light emitting state are the second to fourth light emitting units 155 from the left. In this case, the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state is shifted by one to the left. Second holding information corresponding to the order of the light emitting units 155 in the special light emitting state by confirming that any one of the light emitting units 155 in the second special figure holding display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that a big hit result or a small hit result will occur. The special light emission state is not limited to the configuration in which the light emitting unit 155 is in a blinking state. For example, the light emitting unit 155 may be turned on with a color different from that in the normal light emitting state that is not the special light emitting state. .

  When “1” is set in the special hold notification flag (step S4003: YES), the process for newly starting the special hold notification after step S4004 is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special hold notification from being simultaneously executed in the plurality of light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d.

  When “1” is not set in the special hold notification flag (step S4003: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is 2 or more, thereby remaining the jackpot result in the set state. It is determined whether or not the number of occurrences is two or more (step S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. By doing so, it is determined whether or not there is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time (step S4005). When the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists (step S4005: YES), the process for newly starting the special hold notification after step S4006 is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the remaining number of occurrences of the jackpot result is 2 or more in the set state, the game turn start target is set before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 for which the special hold notification is being executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot result from being triggered by the second hold information that has become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4005, it is determined whether the second hold information acquired this time is a big hit result or a small hit result in a high probability state (step S4006). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 in the second hold information acquired this time is read, and the high-probability determination for the second special figure which is a determination table for referring to the numerical information in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table matches any of the jackpot result.

  When the second hold information acquired this time corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result (step S4006: YES), an execution lottery process for special hold notification is executed (step S4007). In the execution lottery process, the special hold notification table stored in advance in the main ROM 83 is read out, and the numerical information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 84 is read out. Then, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the lottery counter matches the numerical information set in the special hold notification table. When the special hold notification is executed (step S4008: YES), a special hold notification setting process is executed (step S4009). In the setting process, among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126, “1” is set in the special notification target areas in the areas 126a to 126d in which the second reservation information acquired this time is stored. In addition, among the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is set to the special light emitting state. Thereafter, “1” is set to the special hold notification flag in the main RAM 84 (step S4010), and a special hold notification command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 93 (step S4011). By receiving the special hold notification command, the sound light side MPU 93 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the start of the special hold notification.

  The state in which the special light emission state is set indicates that the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results in the set state until the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emission state becomes a game start target. It is canceled when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started in the situation of once. In this case, in the set state, a small hit result may be generated by using the second hold information that is the start target of the game times before the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state. However, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result, the special light emission state in the light emitting unit 155 is continued. This makes it easy for the player to recognize the special light emission state in a situation where the set state continues. Further, in the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result in the set state is one, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started and the special light emission state is released, the light emission in the special light emission state The unit 155 switches to the normal light emission state. Thereby, it is possible to limit the execution period of the hold notification within the range of the set state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4004 that the value of the continuation counter in the main RAM 84 is not 2 or more, it is determined in step S4012 whether the value of the continuation counter in the main RAM 84 is “1”. That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining jackpot result is generated only once in the set state. If a negative determination is made in step S4012, the hold notification control process is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to prevent the special light emission state from being started in a situation that is not the set state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4012, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. Thus, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result exists in the second hold information acquired before the second hold information acquired this time (step S4013). If a negative determination is made in step S4013, the processing after step S4006 already described is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4013, the processing of steps S4009 to S4011 already described is executed on condition that the second hold information acquired this time corresponds to the jackpot result (step S4014). Thereby, the light emission part 155 of the 2nd special figure reservation display part 37d corresponding to the 2nd hold information acquired this time will be in a special light emission state.

  That is, in the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is new. If the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information corresponding to the already acquired jackpot result, the second hold information corresponding to the newly acquired jackpot result is special. The light emission state is started. As a result, a big hit result is generated and triggered by the second hold information that is the start target of the game times prior to the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state, and the set state ends. In this case, the jackpot result is surely generated in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the special light emission state is started in a situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state. In the set state, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is notified by the symbol display device 41, but the notification may not be executed.

  Next, how the hold notification is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (h). 63 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 63 (b) shows the period during which the set state continues, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. 63 (d) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, FIG. 63 (e) shows the period during which the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is “1”, FIG. 63 (f) shows a period during which any one of the light emission units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in the special light emission state, and FIG. 63 (g) shows that the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the first. 2 shows the period during which the special figure holding area 126 is held and stored, and FIG. 63 (h) shows the timing when the second holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), when the game times corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result are completed at the timing t1, the set state is started as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and FIG. 63 (c). As shown in FIG. 2, the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing t2, which is the state in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second reserved information acquired this time among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the special light emitting state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the open / close execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). In this case, since this game time is triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t2, the special light emission state is canceled as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and as shown in FIG. 63 (g). The second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not stored on hold.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result. Then, at the timing of t5, the opening / closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and game times are newly started as shown in FIG. 63 (a).

  By acquiring the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result at the timing of t6, which is the state in which the game times are being executed, the second special figure hold display section 37d of the second special figure hold display section 37d as shown in FIG. Among the light emitting units 155, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is in the special light emitting state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game turn is started at the timing of t7, and the game turn is started at the subsequent timing of t8. Since the game times started at the timing of t8 are triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t6, the small hits as shown in FIG. 63 (d) at the timing of t9 when the game times end. The opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the result.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t10, which is the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second reserved information acquired this time among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the special light emitting state.

  Then, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result, game times are started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Also, the game times are started at the timing of t12. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired at the timing of t13, which is the situation in which the game times are being executed. However, at this time point, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result obtained at the timing of t10 is still stored and the special light emission state is set for the second hold information, so this time it was obtained The special light emission state is not set for the second hold information.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Since the game times are triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t15. As shown in FIG. 63A, game times are started at the timing t15. The game times are game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), there is no light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state in the second special figure holding display unit 37d. However, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result obtained at the timing of t13 still exists, the period in which the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the game round is ended as shown in FIG. 63A, and the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result as shown in FIG. 63C. At the timing t17 when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). However, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing t13 is still stored at this time, the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information acquired this time. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are started at the timing of t18 and the timing of t20, respectively, and at the timing of t19 and the timing of t21, respectively, in FIG. 63 (c). As shown, the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is “1”, that is, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result in the set state is one. At the timing of t22, the game times are started as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t23, which is the situation in which the game is being executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is put on hold. However, the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information because the special hold notification is not executed in the special hold notification execution lottery process.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t24, the game round is ended as shown in FIG. 63A, and the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the small hit result as shown in FIG. 63D. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired at the timing of t25, which is the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. In this case, although the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already stored as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the remaining jackpot results in the set state are shown in FIG. 63 (e). The number of occurrences is one. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emission unit 155 of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t25 is in the special light emission state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t26, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is terminated as shown in FIG. 63 (d), and the game is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). In addition, at the timing of t27, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The game round ends at the timing of t28, and at the timing of the t28, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result. Then, the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t29. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the last jackpot result in the set state ends. Therefore, the current set state is completed as shown in FIG. Also, at the timing of t29, the special light emission state for the second hold information ends as shown in FIG. 63 (f).

  In addition, at the timing of t29, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). The game times are game times triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t25. Thereafter, at the timing of t30, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result from the timing of t30 to the timing of t31. Executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If a big hit result does not occur triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times prior to the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state, the execution target of the special light emission state While the big hit result or the small hit result is given with the second hold information as an opportunity, the execution target of the game times is earlier than the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state. When the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information that has become, the jackpot result is given by using the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state as a trigger. Thereby, when a special light emission state occurs, the player is triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times before the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state. It is expected that a jackpot result will be given, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if a jackpot result does not occur triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times prior to the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state, Since the result is given, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from decreasing with respect to the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state.

  In the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired. If the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information corresponding to the already acquired jackpot result, the special light emission state is set for the second hold information corresponding to the newly acquired jackpot result. Is started. As a result, a big hit result is generated and triggered by the second hold information that is the start target of the game times prior to the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emitting state, and the set state ends. In this case, the jackpot result is surely generated in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation that the special light emission state is started in a situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state.

  In the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is two or more in the set state, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the small hit result in a situation where the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired. Is newly acquired, the special light emission state is not set for the newly acquired second hold information. As a result, the situation in which the event that results in the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times prior to the second hold information that is in the special light emission state is left in the set state. It is possible to limit to the situation where the number of occurrence of the jackpot result is one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation where the number of occurrence of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state.

<Another embodiment of the sixth embodiment>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the description of the sixth embodiment described above, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following different form may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the sixth embodiment.

  The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is not limited to a configuration in which a round game is executed only once, and a configuration in which a round game is executed two or more times may be employed. In this case, it is possible to further increase the advantage of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result with respect to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result.

  -Although it was set as the structure which does not generate | occur | produce in the special light emission state simultaneously in the some light emission part 155, it is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce in the special light emission state simultaneously in the some light emission part 155 instead. In this case, in the case where the second hold information that is the execution target of the game time first corresponds to the jackpot result among the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 that is in the special light emission state, By adopting a configuration in which the second hold information to be executed also corresponds to the jackpot result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the simultaneous light emission state in the plurality of light emitting units 155.

  -It is good also as a structure performed in the symbol display apparatus 41 in addition to or instead of the structure performed in the 2nd special figure reservation display part 37d. For example, in a configuration in which the number of hold images corresponding to the number of hold information is displayed on the symbol display device 41, a special hold notification may be executed according to the content of the hold display image.

  -In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired, a special hold notification dedicated thereto may be executed. As a result, when the special hold notification is executed, it is determined that a plurality of jackpot results will be generated, so that the player's attention to whether or not the special hold notification is executed is increased. Is possible.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments. The configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, the combination of the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment). Combination of the embodiments), the configurations of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination thereto.

  Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 101 is controlled by the sound emission controller 91 based on the command output from the main controller 71, the display controller 101 is based on the command output from the main controller 71. May be configured to control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 91 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

  -The device for executing the effects for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the effects of the game times can be executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light-emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects.

  -Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times, or when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right by generating a right, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting entrance part (function for executing the processes of steps S504 and S604 in the main MPU 82);
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S705 to S709 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player (step S1204 in the main MPU 82) To the function of executing the process of step S1208),
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion,
The grant determination means performs the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion, and the game ball is input to the second start ball entering portion. Is configured to perform the grant determination on the second special information acquired based on having entered the ball,
The gaming time control means is configured to at least part of a period in which a gaming time triggered by the first special information is executed and at least one of a period in which the gaming time triggered by the second special information is executed. It is a configuration that can overlap the part,
In the gaming machine, when the first correspondence information that is the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, and the second correspondence information that is the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. , The adjusting means for causing the execution timing relationship between the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information to be a predetermined relationship (at the time of acquisition in the main MPU 82) A gaming machine having a function of executing a setting process.

  According to the feature A1, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information can be executed in duplicate, the overall execution frequency of the game times can be increased. It becomes. In this case, when the first correspondence information that is the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired and the second correspondence information that is the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is obtained, the first correspondence information The relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship. As a result, the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information are generated according to certain rules, and the relative execution timing of each game time is preferred. It becomes possible.

  Feature A2. The adjustment means adjusts the duration of the game times, so that the relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described in the feature A1 only by adjusting the duration of the game times.

  Feature A3. The adjustment means is triggered by the game times triggered by the first special information and started before the game times triggered by the first correspondence information, and the second special information. By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times started before the game times triggered by the second correspondence information, the first correspondence information is triggered The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the relationship between the execution times of the gaming times and the gaming times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship.

  According to the feature A3, the duration of the game times started before the game times triggered by the first correspondence information or the game times started before the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is adjusted. Therefore, the relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information can be easily made a predetermined relationship.

  Feature A4. The adjustment means executes the game times before the first correspondence information when the first special information that triggers the game times before the first correspondence information corresponds to the grant correspondence information and before the second correspondence information. Execution of game times triggered by the first correspondence information and game times triggered by the second correspondence information in at least one of cases where the second special information serving as a trigger corresponds to the grant correspondence information The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein a predetermined process for making the timing relationship a predetermined relationship is not executed.

  According to the feature A4, when the first correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has already been obtained, or the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has already been obtained. In the situation where the second correspondence information is acquired, the adjustment by the adjusting means is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described in the feature A1 while not affecting the execution timing of other special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information.

Feature A5. A plurality of types of grant correspondence information are set,
The adjusting means varies the predetermined relationship according to at least one of a type of the provision correspondence information corresponding to the first correspondence information and a kind of the provision correspondence information corresponding to the second correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

  According to feature A5, according to at least one of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, the execution timing of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information The relationship is changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the relative execution timing of each game time preferable according to the type of correspondence information.

Feature A6. The first special information and the second special information in a situation in which a game round is executed with special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as one of the first special information and the second special information. In the case where a game turn triggered by the other special information among the two special information is started, a means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82 is executed) Function)
As the grant correspondence information, first grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege with a relatively high player's advantage and second grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege with a relatively low player's advantage And are set,
The adjustment means is triggered by the first correspondence information when the first correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the second assignment correspondence information. The relationship between the execution timings of these game times is a predetermined relationship so that the game times can be started in response to the second correspondence information in a situation where the game times are being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the second special corresponding to the second grant correspondence information having a relatively low advantage due to the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant correspondence information having a relatively high advantage. It is possible to invalidate game times triggered by information.

Feature A7. The first special information and the second special information in a situation in which a game round is executed with special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as one of the first special information and the second special information. In the case where a game turn triggered by the other special information among the two special information is started, a means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82 is executed) Function)
As the grant correspondence information, first grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege with a relatively high player's advantage and second grant correspondence information corresponding to grant of a privilege with a relatively low player's advantage And are set,
When the first correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information, the adjustment unit uses one of the correspondence information as an opportunity. The feature times A1 to A6 are characterized in that the relationship between the execution timings of these game times is a predetermined relationship so that the game times triggered by the other are not started when the game times are being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A7, the second special corresponding to the first grant corresponding information having a relatively high game degree and the advantage that is triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant corresponding information having a relatively high advantage. It is possible to prevent one of game times triggered by information from being invalidated by the other.

Feature A8. The adjusting means includes
The first correspondence information is acquired for the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information and started before the game times triggered by the first correspondence information. First adjustment means for executing a first adjustment process for adjustment based on the function (a function for executing the processes in steps S1302 to S1308 in the main MPU 82);
The second correspondence information is acquired for the duration of the game times triggered by the second special information and started before the game times triggered by the second correspondence information. Second adjustment means (function for executing the processes of steps S1309 to S1315 in the main MPU 82) for executing a second adjustment process for adjustment based on;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information is adjusted based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the second special information is acquired based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. The duration of game times triggered by information is adjusted. Thereby, compared with the structure which adjusts only one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information, the game triggered by the first correspondence information It becomes easier to make adjustments so that the relationship between the execution times of the game times and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship.

Feature A9. The first adjustment means executes the first adjustment process based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information regardless of whether or not the second correspondence information is acquired;
The second adjustment means executes the second adjustment process based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information regardless of whether or not the first correspondence information is acquired. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A9, the first adjustment process is executed regardless of whether the second correspondence information is acquired based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the first correspondence is executed based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. Since the second adjustment process is executed regardless of whether or not information is acquired, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the execution timing of each adjustment process.

  Note that the configuration of the features A1 to A9 may be any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting entrance part (function for executing the processes of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main MPU 82);
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
Based on the grant determination result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the grant determination result is given by a first privilege grant means (main side) that grants a first privilege to the player. The function of executing the process of step S2307 in the MPU 82),
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82),
Transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (function of executing the processing of step S2503 and step S2504 in the main-side MPU 82);
An ending means (a function for executing the processing in steps S2302 to S2305 in the main MPU 82) for ending the advantageous gaming state after the number of times of execution of the gaming times reaches the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state;
Special notification control for causing the special notification corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information acquired by the special information acquisition means to be executed at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the grant determination. Means (a function for executing a pending command selection process in the main MPU 82, a function for executing a pending command handling process in the display MPU 103),
With
The special notification control means determines the number of triggers which is one of the number of game times executed in the advantageous game state and the number of remaining game times required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous game state. A gaming machine comprising content adjusting means (a function of executing the process of step S2707 in the main MPU 82) for making the execution content of the special notification different as at least one criterion.

  According to the feature B1, even if the advantageous game state is entered, the advantageous game state is ended when the number of times of execution of the game times reaches the end reference number in the advantageous game state. Thereby, in the advantageous game state, the game is performed while being aware of the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information is subjected to the determination of grant. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict the contents of the special information before the game times triggered by the special information are started. Furthermore, the execution contents of the special notification are different with the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state as at least one criterion. This makes it possible to associate the content of the special notification with the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, and to increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature B2. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which a probability of a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is relatively high as a judgment mode. And
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the high probability mode.

  According to the feature B2, even if the mode is shifted to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is ended when the number of game times executed reaches the end reference number in the high probability mode. Thereby, in the high probability mode, the game is performed while being aware of the remaining number of times of the high probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information is subjected to the determination of grant. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player to predict the contents of the special information before the game times triggered by the special information are started. Furthermore, the execution contents of the special notification are different with the remaining number of continuations of the high probability mode as at least one criterion. As a result, the content of the special notification can be associated with the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode, and the degree of attention to the special notification can be increased.

Feature B3. The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion,
The grant determination means performs the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion, and the game ball is input to the second start ball entering portion. Is configured to perform the grant determination on the second special information acquired based on having entered the ball,
The special notification control means is based on the fact that the trigger information that is at least one of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information and the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. A special notification is to be executed,
The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the content adjusting unit makes the execution content of the special notification different according to the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the trigger information is acquired.

  According to the feature B3, in the configuration in which the first special information and the second special information are individually acquired, a special notification is triggered when the first special information or the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. Since the special notification is executed in association with the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state, the first special within the range of the remaining number of continuations in the high probability mode when the special notification is executed. It becomes possible for the player to recognize which of the game times triggered by information and the game times triggered by the second special information should be digested.

Feature B4. In the advantageous gaming state, priority means that makes the game times triggered by the second special information easier to digest than the game times triggered by the first special information (specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82) Function to execute)
The game according to Feature B3, wherein the content adjustment unit makes the execution content of the special notification differ according to the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. Machine.

  According to the feature B4, in the advantageous gaming state, the game times triggered by the second special information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first special information. Therefore, the second special information is obtained in the advantageous gaming state. A lot of game times triggered by this will be executed. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired Therefore, the execution contents of the special notification are different. Thereby, the situation where the game times triggered by the second special information should be preferentially digested should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second special information are not executed and the corresponding correspondence information is handled. It becomes possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game times triggered by the first special information should be executed.

  Feature B5. At least in the advantageous gaming state, when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information, second privilege granting means for granting the player a second privilege (function to execute the process of step S2309 in the main MPU 82) A gaming machine according to Feature B4, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B5, in the configuration in which the number of game times triggered by the second special information is executed in the advantageous gaming state, the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information even if the second special information does not correspond to the provision correspondence information. As a result, the second privilege is given to the player. In this case, it is advantageous for the player to execute many game times triggered by the second special information in the advantageous game state. On the other hand, when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in the advantageous gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player that the game times triggered by the first special information are executed in the advantageous gaming state. It becomes. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired Due to the difference in the execution contents of the special notification due to the relationship, the game times triggered by any special information are executed within the range of the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state through the execution contents of the special notification. It becomes possible to make a player recognize whether it should be.

Feature B6. The gaming time control means is configured to at least part of a period in which a gaming time triggered by the first special information is executed and at least one of a period in which the gaming time triggered by the second special information is executed. It is a configuration that can overlap the part,
In the advantageous gaming state, the priority means is that the game times triggered by the second special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information than the game times triggered by the first special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information. The game machine according to Feature B4 or B5, wherein the duration of the game times is shortened.

  According to the feature B6, since the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information are executed in duplicate, the number of game times executed per unit time is increased. Is possible. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, the game times that are triggered by the second special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information have a longer duration of game times than the game times that trigger the first special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information. Since it becomes short, it becomes easy to digest game times triggered by the second special information in the advantageous gaming state. Even if the game times triggered by the second special information are easily digested in the advantageous gaming state as described above, the game times triggered by the first special information and the second special information are triggered as described above. Thus, the game times triggered by the first special information are also executed in the advantageous game state. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information, and the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired Due to the difference in the execution contents of the special notification in relation to the above, the player can determine which special information should be executed within the range of the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state. Can be recognized.

Feature B7. The content adjusting means is
Regardless of the number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second special information, the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is the first special information. When the number of game times triggered by information is the number of times that can be started in the current advantageous gaming state, the first content adjustment means (step S2712 in the main MPU 82) causes the first special notification to be executed as the special notification. A function for executing the process of step S2807 in the display-side MPU 103),
When the number of times the game is triggered by the second special information is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, the first special When the number of game times triggered by information is the number that cannot be started in the current advantageous gaming state, the second content adjustment means (step S2710 in the main MPU 82) is configured to execute the second special notification as the special notification. A function for executing the process of step S2804 in the display-side MPU 103),
A gaming machine according to Feature B6, comprising:

  According to the feature B7, when the first special notification is executed, the game times triggered by the second special information until the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information are started. The player can recognize that as much as possible should be digested. On the other hand, when the second special notification is executed, the game times triggered by the second special information so that the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information are executed in the advantageous gaming state. The player can recognize that the number of executions should be adjusted. Thereby, it becomes possible to change the mode of operation of launching the game ball according to the content of the special notification.

Feature B8. The first content adjusting unit is configured to execute a notification that enables a player to recognize that the launch operation aimed at obtaining the second special information should be continued as the first special notification.
The second content adjusting means triggers the second special information as the second special notification for starting the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the high probability state. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein a notification that enables the player to recognize the upper limit number of times of gaming times is executed.

  According to the feature B8, the player who confirmed the first special notification will continue the launch operation aiming to acquire the second special information, and the player who confirmed the second special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. The number of executions of the game times triggered by the second special information is adjusted so that the game times triggered by the first special information are executed in the advantageous gaming state. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the importance of special alerting | reporting and to raise the attention degree to special alerting | reporting.

Feature B9. The grant correspondence information includes first grant correspondence information in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is the advantageous gaming state, and a second state in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is not the advantageous gaming state. Grant correspondence information is set,
The first content adjusting unit may be configured such that the number of times of triggering at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is the number of times of execution of game times triggered by the second special information. Even if there is a number of times that the game times triggered by the first special information can be started in the current advantageous game state, the first special information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information. The first special notification is not executed, and the first special notification is executed when the first special information corresponds to the second provision correspondence information. A gaming machine according to B7 or B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the first special information corresponds to the second provision correspondence information, the first special notification is executed. As a result, if the advantageous gaming state is impossible to continue, the game times triggered by the second special information should be digested as much as possible so that more profits are given to the player until then. Can be prompted to the player. On the other hand, when the first special information corresponds to the first provision correspondence information, the first special notification is not executed. As a result, the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first grant correspondence information will not be executed due to the fact that many game times triggered by the second special information are digested. It is possible to prevent the occurrence from being triggered by the execution of the first special notification.

  Feature B10. The second content adjusting means is configured such that the number of times of triggering at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of game times triggered by the second special information. In some cases, when the number of game times triggered by the first special information is a number that cannot be started in the current advantageous game state, the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous game state. The second special notification is executed when the second special notification is performed, and the second special notification is performed when the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information even in a gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein notification is not executed.

  According to the feature B10, when the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state, the second special notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the first special information should be used as an opportunity to execute the game times in the advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, if the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information even in a gaming state that is not in the advantageous gaming state, the first special information is assumed to be an opportunity to execute the game times after the advantageous gaming state ends. Will also be given the first privilege. In this case, since the first special information does not need to be executed in the current advantageous gaming state, the second special notification is not executed in such a situation, so that the need for execution is low. It is possible to prevent the second special notification from being executed.

Feature B11. Variable pitching means (special prize winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state (execution of special electricity starting process, special electricity opening process, special electricity closing process and small hitting process in the main MPU 82) Function)
With
The first privilege granting unit shifts the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control unit is executed as the granting of the first privilege, and the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is It can be a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed by the opening / closing control means when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information at least in the advantageous gaming state, The gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state is provided with means for maintaining the gaming state before the opening / closing control is executed (a function of executing the processing in steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82).
Any one of the characteristics B4 to B10, wherein the game times control means prevents game times from being executed in the specific game state, while allowing game times to be executed in the predetermined game state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B11, when the specific game state is executed by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state, the player can be focused on the specific game state. On the other hand, in the predetermined game state, the game times can be executed, so that the rate of game times can be increased.

  Feature B12. When game times triggered by the second special information are started in a situation where game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information are executed, the second special information is given by the grant information The gaming machine according to Feature B11, further comprising means for preventing it from being handled as correspondence information (a function of executing the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 82).

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from being duplicated using the second special information as a trigger in a situation where the specific game state is executed using the first special information as a trigger. .

  Feature B13. A game turn triggered by the first special information is started in a situation where a game turn triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is executed and a situation where the predetermined game state is executed The gaming machine according to Feature B11 or B12, wherein the first special information can be treated as the provision correspondence information.

  According to the feature B13, the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is because the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information are being executed or are in a predetermined gaming state. It is possible to prevent the information from being handled as the assignment correspondence information.

  Feature B14. At least the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state is triggered by the second special information corresponding to at least the predetermined correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B11 to B13, wherein the gaming machine is set to a period equal to or longer than a total period of a duration of the played game times and an execution period of the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature B14, the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined game state is being executed. Even if the game is started, the game times with the first special information as an opportunity will end after the predetermined gaming state ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state and the specific game state from being executed repeatedly.

  Note that the configuration of the features B1 to B14 may be any one or more of the configurations of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter;
Variable pitching means (special prize winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the open state (execution of special electricity starting process, special electricity opening process, special electricity closing process and small hitting process in the main MPU 82) Function)
Special information acquisition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main side MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start pitching section;
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82),
Based on the result of the grant determination being a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, the opening / closing control means by the opening / closing control means after the game turning operation has ended. Specific transition means (function for executing the process of step S2307 in the main MPU 82) to shift the gaming state to the specific gaming state in which control is executed;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result, the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state can be set to a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the specific gaming state. Changing means (function for executing the processing of steps S2502 to S2506 in the main MPU 82);
Even if the result of the grant determination is not the grant correspondence result, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the game is shifted to a predetermined gaming state in which the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control unit is executed, and the predetermined The game state after the end of the game state is maintained in the game state before the predetermined game state is executed (a function for executing the processes in steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82);
With
The game area is provided with at least a first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (second operating port 34) as the starting ball entering portion,
The grant determination means performs the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion, and the game ball is input to the second start ball entering portion. Is configured to perform the grant determination on the second special information acquired based on having entered the ball,
The gaming time control means is configured to overlap a period in which a gaming time triggered by the first special information is executed and a period in which a gaming time triggered by the second special information is executed. Yes,
A game triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information in the predetermined gaming state generated by the special information of the first special information and the second special information. A gaming machine characterized in that the game can be executed once.

  According to the feature C1, in the predetermined gaming state generated with one of the first special information and the second special information as a trigger, the game times can be executed with the other of the first special information and the second special information as a trigger. . Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the digestibility of game times and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which a probability of a grant correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information is relatively high as a judgment mode. And
The changing means can set the determination mode after the end of the specific gaming state to a mode different from that before the start of the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the specific setting means maintains the determination mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state at a mode before the predetermined gaming state is executed.

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the determination mode can be changed when the specific gaming state is executed and the determination mode is not changed when the predetermined gaming state is executed, the excellent effect as described above can be obtained. It becomes possible to play.

  Feature C3. The game time control means triggers the other special information of the first special information and the second special information in the specific gaming state triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming times are not executed.

  According to the feature C3, when the specific game state is executed by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state, the player can be focused on the specific game state.

  Feature C4. The first special information and the second special information in a situation in which a game round is executed with special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information as one of the first special information and the second special information. In the case where a game turn triggered by the other special information of the two special information is started, a means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the grant correspondence information (the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 82 is executed) A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

  According to the feature C4, in the situation where the specific gaming state is executed by using one of the first special information and the second special information as an opportunity, the other special information of the first special information and the second special information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific gaming state from occurring repeatedly.

  Feature C5. Which of the situations in which the game times corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition is being executed and the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is being executed is triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information. In one of the situations, when a game round is triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information, the other special information can be treated as the grant correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is given as the grant correspondence information because the game times triggered by the special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information are being executed or in a predetermined gaming state. It becomes possible to prevent it from becoming untreated.

  Feature C6. The duration of the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is the duration of the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the establishment of the specific condition and the predetermined gaming state The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5, wherein the gaming machine is set to a period equal to or longer than a total period of the execution period.

  According to the feature C6, the game times triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined game state is being executed. Even if the game is started, the game times with the first special information as an opportunity will end after the predetermined gaming state ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game state and the specific game state from being executed repeatedly.

  Note that the configuration of the features C1 to C6 may be any one or more of the configurations of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Execution of the first effect so that the predetermined effect can be executed when the first profit is given in the first situation, and the predetermined effect is not executed when the first profit is not given in the first situation. Means (Function to execute Steps S3304 and Steps S3306 to S3308 in the sound light side MPU 93 in the fifth embodiment, Function to execute Steps S4009 to S4014 in the main side MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment) When,
In the second situation, the second effect execution means (in the fifth embodiment) enables the predetermined effect to be executed in both cases where the first profit is granted and the second profit is given. A function of executing the processing of steps S3304 and S3305 in the sound light side MPU 93, a function of executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4011 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined effect occurs in the first situation, the grant of the first profit is confirmed, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, the first profit or the second profit is granted. . Thereby, even if it is the same predetermined production, the contents of the profit suggested by the predetermined production differ between the first situation and the second situation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the predetermined production. Become. The player who expects to give the first profit is greatly satisfied with the occurrence of the predetermined effect by the occurrence of the predetermined effect in the first situation. It is expected that it will correspond to the granting of one profit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit.

  According to the feature D2, the player expects the first profit to be given. In this case, by having the configuration of the feature D1, the occurrence of the predetermined effect in the first situation greatly satisfies the occurrence of the predetermined effect, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation. It is expected that it corresponds to the grant of the first profit.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein a part of the situation of the specific period corresponds to the first situation, and a part of the situation of the specific period corresponds to the second situation .

  According to the feature D3, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different even within the specific period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game during the specific period.

Feature D4. Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (a function for executing the hold information acquisition process in the main MPU 82);
Grant determination means (function for executing the processes of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information of the grant correspondence information, the player is given the first profit, The privilege granting means for granting the player the second profit based on the result of the grant determination that the special information corresponds to the second information out of the grant correspondence information. (Function for executing the processing of steps S3006 to S3008 in the main MPU 82);
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means (function to execute special figure change start processing, special figure change processing and special figure determination process in the main MPU 82),
Transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (function of executing the processing of step S2902 and step S2903 in the main MPU 82);
An ending means (function for executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3005 in the main MPU 82) for ending the advantageous gaming state after the number of times of execution of the gaming times has reached the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state;
With
The first situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state is in a predetermined number range,
The second situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state is in a specific number range, according to any one of the features D1 to D3, Game machines.

  According to the feature D4, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different in relation to the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state. Thereby, attention is paid to a predetermined effect in relation to the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D5. The first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit;
The first situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state is a predetermined reference number or more,
The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the second situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous gaming state is less than a predetermined reference number.

  According to the feature D5, when the predetermined effect is generated in a situation where the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit is determined, and the remaining continuation number of the advantageous gaming state When a predetermined effect occurs in a situation where is less than the predetermined reference number, the first profit or the second profit is given. In this case, if a predetermined effect occurs before the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state reaches the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit with higher advantage is determined, and the occurrence of the predetermined effect is determined. Players will be greatly satisfied. In addition, when the predetermined effect is generated in the situation where the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state is less than the predetermined reference number, the first profit or the second profit is determined to be granted, and the player is in the advantageous gaming state. You will be satisfied that some kind of profit was granted by the end.

Feature D6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable pitching means (special prize winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Open / close control means (a function for executing special electricity start processing, special electricity open processing, and special electricity close processing in the main MPU 82) for performing open / close control to switch the variable pitching means to the open state after the open state,
With
The first profit is a profit that shifts to a first specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed, and the gaming state after the end of the first specific gaming state becomes the advantageous gaming state,
The second profit is a profit that shifts to a second specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed and the gaming state after the end of the second specific gaming state becomes the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to D4 or D5, wherein the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is larger in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state.

  According to the feature D6, even if any of the first profit and the second profit is given in the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state is continued, so that the player is satisfied even if any profit is given. However, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable entry means is larger in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state, the player is more satisfied with the first profit. It will be. In this case, since the provision of the first profit is confirmed when the predetermined effect is generated before the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous gaming state reaches the predetermined reference number, the game is generated with respect to the occurrence of the predetermined effect. One will be greatly satisfied. In addition, if a predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state is less than the predetermined reference number, the continuation of the advantageous game state will be confirmed, so that the satisfaction of the predetermined effect is satisfied. Will be.

Feature D7. Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82);
Grant determination means (function for executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information of the grant correspondence information, the player is given the first profit, The privilege granting means for granting the player the second profit based on the result of the grant determination that the special information corresponds to the second information out of the grant correspondence information. (Function for executing the processing of steps S3703 to S3714 in the main MPU 82);
Pre-specifying means for pre-specifying the content of the special information acquired by the special information acquiring means at a timing prior to the special information being subject to the grant determination (in steps S4006 and S4014 in the main MPU 82) Processing function), and
With
The first situation is a situation in which special information corresponding to the first information is included in the special information to be subject to the grant determination prior to the special information to be subject to execution of the predetermined effect. Yes,
The second situation is a situation in which special information corresponding to the first information is not included in the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the special information that is subject to execution of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein:

  According to the feature D7, when an event in which the first profit is granted is not triggered by the special information that is subject to the grant determination before the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect, While the first profit or the second profit is given in response to the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect, the grant determination target is earlier than the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect. When the event that the first profit is granted is triggered by the special information that has become, the first profit is given by the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect. Thereby, when a predetermined production | generation produces | generates, a player is provided with the 1st profit triggered by the special information used as the object of the grant determination before the special information which is the execution target of the said predetermined production. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if an event in which the first profit is granted is not triggered by the special information subject to the grant determination prior to the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect, Since 2 profits are given, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention level from being reduced with respect to the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect.

Feature D8. The hold display control means (step S3504, step S3508, step in the main MPU 82) that causes the hold display corresponding to the number of the special information that is acquired by the special information acquisition means and is not the target of the grant determination to be executed. S3510, step S3603 and step S3604)
The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the predetermined effect is performed by setting a mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be executed of the predetermined effect as a special mode.

  According to the feature D8, since the predetermined effect is executed using the hold display, the player can clearly recognize the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect.

Feature D9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable pitching means (special prize winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Open / close control means (a function for executing special electricity start processing, special electricity open processing, and special electricity close processing in the main MPU 82) for performing open / close control to switch the variable pitching means to the open state after the open state,
With
The first profit is a profit that causes a transition to a first specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed,
The second profit is a profit that causes a transition to the second specific gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed,
The gaming machine according to D7 or D8, wherein the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is larger in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state.

  According to the feature D9, the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit. As a result, it is possible to make the player expect the first profit to be given in response to the special information that has been subject to the grant determination prior to the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect. Become.

Feature D10. The grant determination means has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability that the result of the grant determination is the first correspondence result is relatively high as the determination mode,
When the determination mode shifts from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, at least until the result of the determination of determination becomes the first correspondence result until the number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state reaches the specific number Is a continuous gaming state in which the high probability mode continues,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D9, wherein the first situation occurs when the remaining number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one. .

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a predetermined effect will be generated when the remaining number of occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one.

  Even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features D1 to D10. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (function for executing the processes of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82);
Grant determination means (function for executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information;
Based on the result of the grant determination being a grant response result indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information, a privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player (step S3703 in the main MPU 82) To the function of executing the process of step S3714),
Predetermined notification control means (main side) for executing predetermined notification when the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information has already been acquired A function of executing a hold notification control process in the MPU 82),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information has already been acquired, the predetermined notification is executed. In such a case, a situation where a privilege is given more than once may occur. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the execution of the predetermined notification, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. The predetermined notification control means executes the predetermined notification based on acquisition of the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information in a situation where the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is not acquired. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising means (function for executing the processing of Step S4006 to Step S4011 in the main MPU 82).

  According to the feature E2, even if the predetermined notification is executed, it is possible that the privilege is not granted with the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. . As a result, when the predetermined notification is executed, the player expects that it corresponds to the provision of the privilege twice, and the player's attention to the situation where the predetermined notification is executed can be increased. It becomes possible.

  Feature E3. When the predetermined notification is executed on the basis that the special information is newly acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is not acquired, the special information that is the trigger for executing the predetermined notification is The predetermined notification may be performed based on the fact that the special information is newly acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information has already been acquired, while the provision correspondence information may not be supported. If it is, the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification corresponds to the provision correspondence information, The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2.

  According to the feature E3, it is not determined that the privilege is given by the special information that triggers the execution of the predetermined notification simply by the execution of the predetermined notification. However, in the situation where the predetermined notification is being executed, Granting benefits for special information that triggers execution of specified notifications when benefits are granted triggered by special information that is subject to determination prior to special information that triggers execution of specified notifications Will occur. As a result, when the predetermined notification is started, the player expects that a privilege will be granted with the special information subject to the grant determination prior to the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E4. The hold display control means (step S3504, step S3508, step in the main MPU 82) that causes the hold display corresponding to the number of the special information that is acquired by the special information acquisition means and is not the target of the grant determination to be executed. S3510, step S3603 and step S3604)
The game according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined notification is performed by setting a mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be executed for the predetermined notification as a special mode. Machine.

  According to the feature E4, since the predetermined notification is executed using the hold display, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined notification.

  Note that the configuration of the features E1 to E4 may be any one or more of the configurations of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration that shifts to a special gaming state when a winning result is obtained in an internal lottery based on the fact that a game ball has entered the entrance area provided in the game area, or a predetermined entry A configuration is known in which a game ball enters a special game state based on the game ball entering the club. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 32 ... Special prize winning device, 33 ... 1st operation port, 34 ... 2nd operation port, 82 ... Main side MPU, 83 ... Main side ROM, 84 ... Main side RAM, 93: Sound light side MPU, 103: Display side MPU.

Claims (9)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting entrance part,
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information corresponds to grant correspondence information;
A first privilege granting means for granting a player a first privilege based on the result of the grant determination being a grant response result that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information;
The game turn operation is performed in each game time, when the game turn operation is started and the game turn operation is ended as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination. Game times control means to
Transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
Ending means for ending the advantageous gaming state after the number of times of execution of the gaming times has reached an end reference number in the advantageous gaming state;
Special notification control for causing the special notification corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information acquired by the special information acquisition means to be executed at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the grant determination. Means,
With
The special notification control means determines the number of triggers which is one of the number of game times executed in the advantageous game state and the number of remaining game times required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous game state. A gaming machine comprising: content adjustment means for making the execution content of the special notification different as at least one criterion. The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The grant determination means performs the grant determination on the first special information acquired based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion, and the game ball is input to the second start ball entering portion. Is configured to perform the grant determination on the second special information acquired based on having entered the ball,
The special notification control means is based on the fact that the trigger information that is at least one of the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information and the second special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. A special notification is to be executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the content adjustment unit changes the execution content of the special notification according to the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the trigger information is acquired. Priority means for making the game times triggered by the second special information easier to digest than the game times triggered by the first special information in the advantageous gaming state;
The said content adjustment means makes the execution content of the said special alerting differ according to the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired. Gaming machine.   4. The apparatus according to claim 3, further comprising second privilege granting means for granting a player a second privilege when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information at least in the advantageous gaming state. Game machines. The gaming time control means is configured to at least part of a period in which a gaming time triggered by the first special information is executed and at least one of a period in which the gaming time triggered by the second special information is executed. It is a configuration that can overlap the part,
In the advantageous gaming state, the priority means is that the game times triggered by the second special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information than the game times triggered by the first special information that does not correspond to the grant correspondence information. The game machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the duration of the game times is shortened. The content adjusting means is
Regardless of the number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second special information, the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is the first special information. A first content adjusting means for causing the first special notification to be executed as the special notification when the number of game times triggered by information is the number of times that can be started in the current advantageous gaming state;
When the number of times the game is triggered by the second special information is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of times when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired, the first special A second content adjusting means for causing the second special notification to be executed as the special notification when the number of game times triggered by the information cannot be started in the current advantageous gaming state;
The gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising: The first content adjusting unit is configured to execute a notification that enables a player to recognize that the launch operation aimed at obtaining the second special information should be continued as the first special notification.
The second content adjusting means is triggered by the second special information as the second special notification for starting the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. 7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein a notification is made to allow a player to recognize the upper limit number of times of game times. The grant correspondence information includes first grant correspondence information in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is the advantageous gaming state, and a second state in which the gaming state after the grant of the first privilege is not the advantageous gaming state. Grant correspondence information is set,
The first content adjusting unit may be configured such that the number of times of triggering at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is the number of times of execution of game times triggered by the second special information. Even if there is a number of times that the game times triggered by the first special information can be started in the current advantageous game state, the first special information corresponds to the first grant correspondence information. The first special notification is not executed, and the first special notification is executed when the first special information corresponds to the second provision correspondence information. Item 8. The gaming machine according to Item 6 or 7.   The second content adjusting means is configured such that the number of times of triggering at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is acquired is greater than or equal to a predetermined number of game times triggered by the second special information. In some cases, when the number of game times triggered by the first special information is a number that cannot be started in the current advantageous game state, the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous game state. The second special notification is executed when the second special notification is performed, and the second special notification is performed when the first special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information even in a gaming state that is not the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the notification is not executed.

Images